Home

2003 HUMMER H2 Owner`s Manual

1. wet The 2003 HUMMER H2 Owner s Manual Li 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 Seats and Restraint Systems This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly It also explains the air bag system Features and Controls This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle Comfort Controls and Audio Systems This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system Your Driving and the Road Here you ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions Problems on the Road This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving such as a flat tire or overheated engine etc Service and Appearance Care Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good Maintenance Schedule This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use Customer Assistance Information This section tells you how to contact HUMMER for assistance and how to get service and owner publications It also gives you information on Reporting Safety Defects on page 8 9 GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem HUMMER and the name HUMMER are registered trademarks and H2 is a trademark of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes after that time without furt
2. Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index CAUTION Continued 6 41 Inflation Tire Pressure The Certification Tire label which is on the rear edge of the driver s door shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they re cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km NOTICE Don t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right It s not If your tires don t have enough air underinflation you can get the following Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Bad wear Bad handling Bad fuel economy NOTICE Continued 6 42 NOTICE Continued If your tires have too much air overinflation you can get the following Unusual wear Bad handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Also check the tire pressure of the spare tire How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You can t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moist
3. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter at 100 000 miles 166 000 km Change transfer case fluid 7 11 Scheduled Maintenance 52 500 Miles 87 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant ACTUAL SERVICED BY SERVICED BY velocity joints and axle seals for leaking MILEAGE Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper ay rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant ACTUAL SERVICED BY vin MILEAGE r velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper E r rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Inspect Evaporative Control System Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook up routing and condition Check that the purge valve works properly if equipped Replace as needed An Emission Control Service See footnote 7 12 Scheduled Maintenance 67 500 Miles 112 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Che
4. Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean Tires They are vitally important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure Weather Forecasts What s the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system Maps Do you have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Then here are some tips Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it comfortably cool interior highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to There is something about an easy stretch of road with the sides Check your mirrors and your instruments the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the frequently road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind e Ifyou get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Don t let it or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as road in less than a second and you could crash and an emergency be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen 4 47 Hill and Mountain Roads If you drive regula
5. Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts If you have the choice a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide 1 72 Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A If possible an older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt can t properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time Q What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck At Move the child toward the center of the vehicle but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child
6. To unlock the doors press the other side of the switch On the passenger side of the liftgate opening trim there is another power lock switch which can be used to lock or unlock all of the doors Lockout Prevention This feature prevents you from locking your key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door is open If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the driver s door will unlock Programmable Automatic Door Locks Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock unlock feature which enables you to program your vehicle s power door locks You can program this feature through the Driver Information Center DIC or by the following method Programmable Locking Feature The following is the list of available programming options Mode 1 All doors lock when the transmission is shifted into gear Mode 2 All doors lock when the vehicle speed is greater than 8 mph 13 km h Mode 3 No automatic door locking The automatic door locks were pre programmed at the factory to lock all the doors when the transmission is shifted into gear Mode 1 The following instructions detail how to program your door locks differently than the factory setting Choose one of the three programming options listed above before entering the program mode To enter the program mode do the following 1 Begin with the ignition off
7. Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system only if The trailer parts can withstand 3 000 psi 20 650 kPa of pressure The trailer s brake system will use less than 0 02 cubic inch 0 3 cc of fluid from your vehicle s master cylinder Otherwise both braking systems won t work well You could even lose your brakes If everything checks out this far make the brake tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid to the rear brakes But don t use copper tubing for this If you do it will bend and finally break off Use steel brake tubing Driving with a Trailer If you have a rear most window open and you pull a trailer with your vehicle carbon monoxide CO could come into your vehicle You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness or death See Engine Exhaust in the Index To maximize your safety when towing a trailer Have your exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting on your trip Keep the rear most windows closed If exhaust does come into your vehicle through a window in the rear or another opening drive with your front main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed This will bring fresh outside air into your vehicle Do not use the comfort control setting for maximum air because it only recirculates the air inside your vehicle See Comfort Controls in the Index Towing a tra
8. in the Index for more on this including important safety information 1 67 al Bab OF a United States Canada 1 68 A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Be sure to turn off the air bag before using a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat position If a forward facing child restraint is suitable for your child always move the passenger seat as far back as it will go If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when you have turned off the air bag it means that something may be wrong with the air bag system The right front passenger s air bag could inflate even though the switch is off If this ever happens don t let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right front passenger s position for example don t secure a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s seat until you have your vehicle serviced See Air Bag Off Switch in Although a rear seat is a safer place you can secure a the Index forward facing child restraint in the right front seat 1 69 You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instr
9. 4 57 Add On Equipment When you carry removable items you may need to put a limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment NOTICE Your warranty doesn t cover parts or components that fail because of overloading Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR of the front or rear axle See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index The Cargo Weight Rating CWR is the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry It doesn t include the weight of the people inside But you can figure about 150 lbs 68 kg for each seat The total cargo load must not be more than your vehicle s CWR 4 58 Trailer Recommendations You must subtract your hitch loads from the CWR for your vehicle Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached so that you won t go over the GVWR or GAWR If you are using a weight distributing hitch weigh the vehicle without the equalizer bars in place You ll get the best performance if you spread out the weight of your load the right way and if you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes For more information see Trailer Towing in the Index Towing a Trailer If you don t use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers c
10. Front Flat Tire Attach the jack handle E with the hook end connected to the u hook clevis on the jack A Slide the ratchet F onto the jack handle E with the UP mark facing you Rear Flat Tire Attach the jack handle extension D to the jack handle E and then press the clip arrow so it engages Then attach the jack handle E with the hook end connected to the u hook clevis on the jack A Slide the ratchet F onto the jack handle extension D with the UP mark facing you 5 Turn the ratchet F clockwise to raise the jack head to the lifting point X 28 5 inches 72 0 cm 5 24 Rear Flat Tire Place the jack under the curved rear axle pad Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the rear axle pad is resting securely on the jack head Rear Position Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle 6 Turn the ratchet clockwise to raise the vehicle Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground
11. Press the trip information button until SEASON ODOMETER appears on the display This shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers Pressing the reset stem located on the instrument cluster with the vehicle off will also display the season odometer Hourmeter Press the trip button to scroll to the hourmeter The hourmeter shows the total number of hours the engine has run Pressing the reset stem on the instrument cluster will also display the hourmeter after the season odometer is displayed Annual Log Press the trip button to scroll to the annual log The annual log shows the mileage accumulated since it was last reset To reset the annual log press and hold the select button for two seconds Timer The DIC can be used as a stopwatch Press the select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset not including time the ignition is off Time will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on even if another display is being shown on the DIC The timer will record up to 99 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds 99 59 59 after which the display will roll back to zero To stop the counting of time press the select button briefly while TIMER is displayed To reset the timer to zero press and hold the select button while TIMER is displayed 2 97 Fuel Information Button Use the fuel
12. TTY Users 8 9 Reporting Safety Defects to the 8 4 Customer Assistance Offices United States Government 8 5 GM Mobility Program for Persons 8 10 Reporting Safety Defects to the with Disabilities Canadian Government 8 5 Roadside Assistance Program 8 10 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to HUMMER Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the HUMMER Consumer Relations Manager by calling 1 866 HUMMER6 1 866 486 6376 Customer Assistance prompt In Canada contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French We encourage you to call the toll fre
13. That way the buckles will be out of the way when the seat is folded and will be available for passengers to use when the seat is returned to the passenger position Also make sure that nothing is under or in front of the seat 2 Pull up on the strap loop located at the rear of the seat cushion and pull the seat cushion up Then fold it forward 3 Pull the seatback forward and fold it down until it is flat The rear seatbacks are equipped with rearward folding head restraints When the seatback is being folded down the head restraint will automatically fold rearward If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes with the cushion try moving the front seat forward and or bringing the front seatback more upright Returning the Seats to an Upright Position To return the seat to the upright position do the following 1 Lift the seatback up and push it rearward all the way 2 Lower the seat cushion until it latches into position 3 Pull forward on the seatback and up on the seat cushion to make sure the seat is securely in place 4 Return the head restraints to the upright position 5 Check to see that the safety belt buckles on the driver s side seatback are accessible to the outboard and center occupants and are not under the seat cushions Third Row Single Seat If Equipped To fold the seatback do the following Pull up on the release lever labeled 1 located on the rear of the seatback and
14. Turn the lock counterclockwise with your ignition key to engage the safety lock Turn the lock clockwise with your ignition key to disengage the safety lock 3 Close the door 4 Do the same thing to the other rear door Keyless Entry System You can lock and unlock your doors and liftgate from about 3 feet 1 m up to 30 feet 9 m away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device 2 11 Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment At times you may notice a decrease in range This is normal for any remote keyless entry system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the tr
15. WAY 6 WAY 4 WAY 6 WAY 6 WAY A BRN GRY D CRM D HDLNR 1 A 12 WAY M BRN INFO A 12 WAY D BLK AR 6 62 Relay Connector Name SEO TRAILER UPFIT SL RIDE HDLR 2 BODY DEFOG HDLR 1 SPARE RELAY CB SEAT CB RIGHT DOOR SPARE INFO Usage Special Equipment Option Off Road Lamps Harness Connector Trailer Brake Wiring Upfitter Not Used Ride Control Not Used Headliner Wiring Connector 2 Body Wiring Connector Rear Defogger Relay Headliner Wiring Connector 1 Not Used Driver and Passenger Seat Module Circuit Breaker Right Rear Power Window Passenger Door Module Not Used Infotainment Unit Not Used Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse relay block is located near the battery in the engine compartment See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on its location Lift the cover for access to the fuse relay block 6 63 6 64 Replace cover after servicing NOTE The function and FUNCTION AMP GAS Remettre le couvercle en place FUNCTION AMP DIESEL REMARQUE La fonction et l intensit de amperage of these fuses FONCTION INTENSITE ESSENCE FONCTION INTENSITE DIESEL ces fusibles sont diff rentes pour les are different for gas and INJ 2 154 diesel fueled engines See INJ 1 15A Owners Manual C for O2A 15A functions of studs 1 and 2 O2B 15A IGN 1 EDU 25A moteurs amp essence et les moteurs diesel ECMRPV 15A Vo
16. t your vehicle needs service Turn off If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the engine the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty 5 13 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank If you haven t found a problem yet check to see if coolant is visible in the surge tank If coolant is visible but the coolant level isn t at or above the FULL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank but be sure the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is cool before you do it See Engine Coolant in the Index for more information If no coolant is visible in the surge tank add coolant as follows Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 5 14 Adding only plain water to your cooling system
17. 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Fax Number 313 381 0022 Canada General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 All Overseas Locations Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle hand controls wheelchair scooter lifts etc This program can also provide you with free resource information such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers The program is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users
18. Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle Return the positive remote terminal cover to its original position Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed See Roadside Assistance in the Index If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing in the Index Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle s instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage in the Index In addition you may find a LOW COOLANT ENGINE COOLANT HOT ENGINE OVERHEATED and a REDUCED ENGINE POWER message in the DIC on the instrument panel See Driver Information Center in the Index Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If an overheated engine condition exists and the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode you will notice a loss in power and engine performance This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency Driving extended miles km and or towing a trailer in the ov
19. For the oil life system to work properly you must reset the system every time the oil is changed When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it will indicate that an oil change is necessary A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will come on Change your oil as soon as possible within the next two times you stop for fuel It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the oil life 7 6 system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally you must change your oil at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Oil Life System in the Index for information on resetting the system An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components with each engine oil and filter change Lubricate the front suspension ball joints steering linkage transmission shift linkage and parking brake cable guides Ball joints should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10 F 12 C or higher or they could be damaged Scheduled Maintenance ENGINE OIL CHANGE 7 7 Scheduled Maintenance ENGINE OIL CHANGE ACTUAL ENGINE OIL CHANGE 7 8 Scheduled Maint
20. Shifting to 4HI or 4HI Lock With the vehicle traveling less than 40 mph 64 km h press and release the 4HI or 4HI Lock button The indicator light will flash while shifting It will remain illuminated when the shift is complete Shifting to 4LO Lock To shift to 4LO Lock the vehicle s engine must be running and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 2 mph 3 2 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N The preferred method for shifting into 4LO Lock is to have your vehicle moving or 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4LO Lock button You must wait for the 4LO Lock indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear If the 4LO Lock button is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4LO Lock indicator light will flash for 15 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 2 mph 3 2 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N After 30 seconds the transfer case will return to the setting last chosen 2 30 Shifting Out of 4LO Lock To shift from 4LO Lock to 4HI or 4HI Lock your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 2 mph 3 2 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N and the engine running The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO Lock is to have your vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press the 4HI or 4HI Lock button You must wait for the 4HI or 4HI Lock indicator light to stop flashing and
21. call 1 800 833 9935 GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details All TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 Roadside Assistance Program HUMMER s Roadside Assistance provides stranded owners with over the phone roadside repairs location of the nearest HUMMER dealer or the following special services Flat Tire Change Installation of spare tire will be covered at no charge customer is responsible for repair or replacement of tire Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the customer to get to the nearest service station up to 5 00 will be covered Jump Start No start situations which require a battery jump start will be covered at no charge Lock Out Replacement keys or locksmith service will be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle Delivery of the replacement key will be covered at no charge within 10 miles 16 km Emergency Towing Service Towing to the nearest HUMMER dealer for warranty related disablements will be covered Trip Routing Custom made computerized highlighted maps using the most direct or scenic route are provided free of charge Maps include points of interest and a list of HUMMER dealers along the route Also included is a list of hotels along the route that are discounted through affiliation with Quest International Trip Routing is available through Roadside Assistance by calling 1 866 HUMMER6 486 6376 Please be pr
22. could begin to move You or others could be At least every spring use plain water to flush any ie corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to injured and property could be damaged Make clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case can collect it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move 7 19 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year for instance each spring and fall You should let your dealer s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual See Service and Owner Publications in the Index Steering and Suspension Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc 7 20 Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust system Inspect the body near the exhaust system Look for broken damaged missing or out of position parts as well as open seams holes loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build up in the floor pan or
23. door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink buttons should be erased for security purposes Refer to Programming HomeLink Step 1 only or for assistance contact HomeLink on the internet at www homelink com or by calling 1 800 355 3515 Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate operator you are programming When programming a garage door it is advised to park outside of the garage It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency 2 72 Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the transmitter Follow these steps to program up to three channels 1 Press and hold down the two outside buttons releasing only when the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not hold down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program a second and or third transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink buttons Position the end of your hand held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the indicator light in view Simultan
24. in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 97 500 Miles 162 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Inspect spark plug wires An Emission Control Service Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service 7 14 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Scheduled Maintenance Change automatic transmission fluid and if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions Inheavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter Change transfer case fluid Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV valve An Emission Control Service 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months sin
25. knob The radio will beep once and will adjust the display level to the middle position To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when tone or speaker controls are not displayed The radio will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display 3 24 Using RDS Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System RDS RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information Using this system the radio can do the following Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies display messages from radio stations and seek to stations with traffic announcements This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will work only when the information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station While you are tuned to an RDS station the station name or the call letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency RDS stations may also provide the time of day a program type PTY for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast Finding a PTY Station P TYPE Program Type Button Press this button to turn on and off program type PTY select mode PTY and the light
26. make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe Turn on your hazard flashers You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful 4 52 Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You can t see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn t collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that s away from the wind This will help keep CO out Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while
27. move the band to off Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they re frozen to the windshield carefully loosen or thaw them If your blades do become worn or damaged get new blades or blade inserts Windshield Washer WY Washer Fluid There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction lever To spray washer fluid on the windshield push the paddle The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed In freezing weather don t use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision Rear Window Washer Wiper This knob is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel To turn the rear wiper on turn the knob to either 1 or 2 For long delayed wiping turn the knob to 1 For short delayed wiping turn the knob to 2 Off To turn the wiper off turn the knob to this symbol 6 Washer Fluid To wash the window press the knob with this symbol The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as the windshield washer However the rear window washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer If you can wash your windshield but not your rear windows check the fluid level For more information see Low Washer Fluid in the Index 2 45 Cruise Control Off This position turns the system
28. s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides in the Index If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child s face or neck you might want to place the child in the center seat position the one that has only a lap belt 1 73 Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash 1 74 Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt isn t long enough to fasten your dealer will order you an extender It s free When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you The extender will be just for you and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose Don t let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit To wear it just
29. you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in the Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may write to Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5 8 10 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope yov ll notify us Please call us at 1 866 HUMMER6 1 866 486 6376 or write HUMMER Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33177 Detroit MI 48232 5177 In Canada please call us at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French Or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc RETAIL SELL PRICE 120 00 Transmission Transaxle Transfer Case Unit Repair Manual This manual provides informa
30. your vehicle If you are in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures Engine Oil Additives Don t add anything to your oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good performance and engine protection When to Change Engine Oil GM Oil Life System Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly you must reset the system every time the oil is changed When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it will indicate that an oil change is necessary A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will come on Change your oil as soon as possible within the next two times you stop for fuel It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset It is also important to check your oil regularl
31. 10 Setting the Time 3 36 Care of Your Compact Disc Player 3 11 AM FM Radio with Cassette Tape and 3 36 Roof Mast Antenna Compact Disc Player with Radio Data System 3 36 Chime Level Adjustment RDS and Automatic Tone Control Bose 3 21 AM FM Radio with Six Disc Compact Disc Player with Equalization and Radio Data System RDS Bose If Equipped Comfort Controls This section tells you how to use the comfort controls With these systems you can control the heating cooling and ventilation in your vehicle Your vehicle also has a flow through ventilation system described later in this section Comfort Controls Personalization You can store and recall the climate control settings for temperature air delivery mode and fan speed for two different drivers The personal choice settings recalled are determined by the transmitter used to enter the vehicle After the button with the unlock symbol on a remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed the climate control will adjust to the last settings of the identified driver The settings can also be changed by pressing one of the memory buttons 1 or 2 located on the driver s door When adjustments are made the new settings are automatically saved for that driver 3 2 Automatic Dual Zone Comfort Control System With this system you can select different comfort control settings for the driver and passengers P Fan The switch with the fan symbol allows you to manual
32. 7 Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire 5 25 8 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off 5 26 Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident 9 After mounting the spare put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel Tighten each wheel nut by hand Then use the ratchet wheel wrench to tighten the nuts with the UP mark facing you clockwise until the wheel is held against the hub You will not be tightening the nuts fully yet Front Position Rear Position 10 Lower the vehicle by turning the ratchet counterclockwise with the DOWN mark facing you Lower the jack completely Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown by turning the ratchet clockwise with the UP mark facing you Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and e
33. A few driving trips should turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel See Fuel in the Index Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Here are some things you need to know in order to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the CHECK ENGINE light is on or not working properly Your vehicle will not pass this inspecti
34. AUTO EQ settings for each preset and source Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AUDIO To adjust the balance to the right and the left speakers push and release the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears on the display Turn the knob to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until the radio produces one beep The balance and fade will be adjusted to the middle position and the display will show the speaker balance To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed The radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the level display in the middle position 3 13 Using RDS Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System RDS RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information Using this system the radio can do the following Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies display messages from radio stations and seek to stations with traffic announcements This system relies upon receiving specif
35. Relay Turn Signal Hazard Switch Starter Relay Electronic Brake Controller TC2 Mode Switch Electronic Brake Controller Battery Feed Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring Powertrain Control Module Fuel Pump Fuel Pump Relay Oxygen Sensors Name B U LP RR DEFOG HDLP HI PRIME 02B SIR FRT PRK DRL SEO IGN TBC IGN1 HI HDLP LT LH HID DRL Usage Backup Lamps Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Rear Window Defogger Headlamp High Beam Relay Not Used Oxygen Sensors Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System Front Parking Lamps Sidemarker Lamps Daytime Running Lamps Relay Rear Defog Relay Truck Body Controller Ignition High Beam Headlamp Left Not Used Daytime Running Lamps Name IPC DIC HVAC ECAS CIG LTR HI HDLP RT HDLP LOW A C COMP A C COMP RR WPR RADIO SEO B1 LO HDLP LT BTSI Usage Instrument Panel Cluster Driver Information Center Climate Control Controller Electronically Controlled Air Suspension Module Cigarette Lighter High Beam Headlamp Right Headlamp Low Beam Relay Air Conditioning Compressor Air Conditioning Compressor Relay Rear Wiper Washer Audio System Mid Bussed Electrical Center Rear Heated Seats HomeLink Headlamp Low Beam Left Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System Name CRANK LO HDLP RT FOG LP FOG LP HORN W S WASH W S WASH INFO RDO AMP RH HID HORN EAP TREC SBA Usage Starting System Headlamp Low
36. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle Turn the ignition to Lock See Ignition Positions in the Index for more information Shifting an all wheel drive vehicle s transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P You or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL 4 55 Loading Your Vehicle GAWR FRT Cc RIM COLD TIRE PRESSURE Cc Co The Certification Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver s door The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo 4 56 The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle And if you do have a heavy load you should spread it out Do not load your vehicle any heavie
37. The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected contact your dealer If your radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem Rear Seat Audio This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any of the music sources radio cassette tapes or CDs The rear seat passengers can only control the music sources that the front seat passengers are not listening to For example rear seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape or CD through headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones The front seat audio controls always override the rear seat audio controls VOL Volume Turn the knob to increase and to decrease volume The left VOL knob controls the left headphone and the right VOL knob controls the right headphone SRC Source Press this button to choose which source radio CD or cassette that you want to listen to V SEEK A Press the SEEK button to seek to the next station and stay there The display will show your selection To scan preset stations press and hold the SEEK button The radio will scan to a preset station play for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station The displa
38. Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes 4 53 Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground and dolly towing towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly With the proper preparation and equipment many vehicles can be towed in these ways See Dinghy Towing and Dolly Towing following Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing What s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations How far will you tow Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow Do you have the proper towing equipment See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations Is your vehicle ready to be towed Just as you would prepare your ve
39. Then pull the turn signal multifunction lever toward you and hold it there while you perform the next step 2 8 2 Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice Then with the key in LOCK release the turn signal multifunction lever Once you do this you will hear the lock switch lock and unlock the horn will chirp twice and a 30 second program timer will begin You are now ready to program the automatic door locks 3 Select one of the three programming options listed previously and press the lock side of the power door lock switch to cycle through the lock options You will have 30 seconds to begin programming If you exceed the 30 second limit the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have left the program mode If this occurs repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 to re enter the programming mode You can exit the program mode any time by turning the ignition to RUN the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you are leaving the program mode If the lock unlock switches are not pressed while in the programming mode the current auto lock unlock setting will not be modified See your dealer for more information Programmable Unlocking Feature The following is the list of available programming options Mode 1 Driver s door unlocks when the transmission is shifted into PARK P Mode 2 All doors unlock when the trans
40. These buttons have factory PTY presets You can set up to 12 PTYs six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2 2 Press the P TYPE button to activate program type select mode 3 Turn the P TYPE knob to select a PTY 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the PTY you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton 3 25 RDS Messages ALERT Alert warns of local or national emergencies When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station ALERT will appear on the display You will hear the announcement even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing If the compact disc player is playing play will stop during the announcement You will not be able to turn off alert announcements ALERT will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system This feature is not supported by all RDS stations INFO Information If the current station has a message INFO will appear on the display Press this button to see the message The message may the artist and song title call in phone numbers etc If the whole message is not displayed parts of it will appear every three seconds To scroll through the message at your own speed press the INFO button repeatedly A new group of words will appear on the display with each press Once the complete message has been disp
41. a week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your dealer This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them If you go to your dealer for your service needs you ll know that GM trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle This schedule is for vehicles that carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on your vehicle s Certification Tire label See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits are driven off road in the recommended manner See Off Road Driving in the Index use the recommended fuel See Fuel in the Index Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 1
42. and an older child riding in a booster seat Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat Here s why A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat CAUTION Continued 1 56 You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat but before you do always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat Wherever you install it be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Top Strap Some child restraints have a top strap or top tether It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision For it to work a top strap must be properly anchored to the vehicle Some top strap equipped child restraints are designed for use with or without the top strap being anchored Others require the top strap always to be anchored Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint If yours requires that the top strap be ancho
43. animals If you re tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you re driving don t wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who doesn t lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it s easier to p
44. appears in the display Release the button After about four seconds of inactivity the new zone number will be locked in and the comp temp display will return 4 Calibrate the compass as described below Compass Calibration The compass may need calibration if one of the following occurs If after five seconds the display does not show a compass heading N for North for example there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item The compass does not display the correct heading and the compass zone variance is set correctly In order to calibrate CAL must be displayed in the mirror compass windows If CAL is not displayed press the COMP button for approximately 12 seconds or until CAL is displayed The compass can be calibrated in one of two ways Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph 8 km h or less until the display reads a direction or drive the vehicle on your everyday routine and after several turns the compass will become calibrated and will display a direction Cleaning the Mirror Use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing 2 55 Power Outside Rearview Mirrors The controls are located on the driver s door armrest Move t
45. as follows Park your vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in PARK P With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in PARK P Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps Set See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for further information on location The transmission dipstick handle is located at the rear of the engine compartment Your vehicle s dipstick may have a graphic as shown or may be labeled TRANS LOCK 1 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 2 Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again 3 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level The fluid level must be in the COLD area below the cross hatched area for a cold check or in the HOT area or cross hatched area for a hot check 4 If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Add fluid only after checking t
46. be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh 4 000 Ibs 1 814 kg or less You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than 4 000 Ibs 1 814 kg You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 km h and don t make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads You can tow in DRIVE D You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions See Tow Haul Mode in the Index 4 60 Three important considerations have to do with weight the weight of the trailer the weight of the trailer tongue and the weight on your vehicle s tires Tow Haul Mode Tow haul mode is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load The purpose of the tow haul mode is to Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a heavy trailer or
47. been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Do not use any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol HOT FOR THIS WEATHER SYMBOL If you choose to perform the engine oil change service yourself be sure the oil you use has the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container SAE 10 20 ACCEPTABLE IF 5W 30 IS NOT If you have your oil changed for you be sure the oil SAESW 30 AVAILABLE put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute RECOMMENDED certified for gasoline engines idna COLD You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your WEATHER vehicle as shown in the viscosity chart DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED 6 14 As in the chart shown previously SAE 5W 30 is the only viscosity grade recommended for your vehicle You should look for and use only oils which have the API Starburst symbol and which are also identified as SAE 5W 30 If you cannot find such SAE 5W 30 oils you can use an SAE 10W 30 oil which has the API Starburst symbol if it s going to be 0 F 18 C or above Do not use other viscosity grade oils such as SAE 10W 40 or SAE 20W 50 under any conditions OTICE Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for
48. comes on as a reminder to buckle up See Safety Belt Reminder Light in the Index In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here s why They work You never know if you ll be in a crash If you do have a crash you don t know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn t survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot 1 17 Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Put someone on it Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it s just a seat on wheels 1 18 Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something doesn t stop In areal vehicle it could be the windshield 1 19 or the instrument panel 1 20 or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That s why safety belts make such good sense Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts and the Answers Q A lS Won t I be tr
49. coverage information Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Canadian Vehicles For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program Please consult your dealer for details General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA
50. event that you are unable to drive Concierge Services The concierge advisor can obtain tickets reservations or help with vacation trip planning and other unique items and services OnStar System Limitations Complete limitations can be found on the subscriber services agreement In order to provide you with excellent service calls with the OnStar Center may be monitored or recorded OnStar Service is available in the 48 contiguous United States Alaska Hawaii and Canada available when the vehicle is within the operating range of a cellular provider subject to limitations caused by atmospheric conditions such as severe weather or topographical conditions such as mountainous terrain subject to cellular carrier equipment limitations subject to limitations caused by baggage loaded on the roof rack and placement of the luggage rack crossrails if equipped Global positioning locating capabilities will not be available if satellite signals are obstructed OnStar will not function if the vehicle s battery is discharged or disconnected It may also be inoperative if the vehicle is in an accident and the OnStar or vehicle electrical system components are damaged OnStar is the communication link between you and existing governmental emergency and roadside service providers OnStar will receive your call and use reasonable effort to contact an appropriate provider OnStar cannot promise that the providers will
51. following the steps below to do it safely Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you don t follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you NOTICE Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn t be covered by your warranty The ACDelco battery in your vehicle has a built in hydrometer Do not charge test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won t work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system NOTICE If the other system isn t a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables 4 Open the hoods and locate the positive and can reach but be sure the vehicles aren t touching negative terminal locations on the other vehicle each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you don t want You wouldn t be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems Your vehicle has a remote positive jump
52. hill at full speed can cause an accident There could be a drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed As you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert 4 29 Q What should I do if my vehicle stalls or is about to stall and I can t make it up the hill If this happens there are some things you should do and there are some things you must not do First here s what you should do Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards Also apply the parking brake If your engine is still running shift the transmission to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE R If your engine has stopped running you ll need to restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to PARK P and restart the engine Then shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE R 4 30 As you are backing down the hill put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position This way you ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down It s best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover Here are s
53. hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle A baby doesn t weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it CAUTION Continued 1 50 Children who are up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer outstanding protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Q A What are the different types of add on child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In add
54. into the player again lt REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release it to play the passage The display will show elapsed time FWD gt Forward Press and hold this button to advance quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release it to play the passage The display will show elapsed time 3 28 RPT Repeat With repeat you can repeat one track or an entire disc To use repeat do the following To repeat the track you are listening to press and release the RPT button RPT will appear on the display Press RPT again to turn it off To repeat the disc you are listening to press and hold the RPT button for two seconds until you hear a beep RPT will appear on the display Press RPT again to turn if off RDM Random With random you can listen to the tracks in random rather than sequential order on one disc or on all of the discs To use random do one of the following To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in random order press and hold RDM for more than two seconds You will hear a beep and RANDOM ONE will appear on the display Press RDM again to turn if off To play the tracks on all of the discs that are loaded in random order press and release the RDM button RANDOM ALL will appear on the display Press RDM again to turn it off AUTO EQ Automatic Equalization Press AUTO EQ
55. is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park ina garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Blizzard in the Index It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you ve left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P 2 37 All wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL Always set your parking brake Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won t move See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index 2 38 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System If Equipped The electronically controlled air suspension keeps the rear of your vehicle level as you load and unload it The system includes a compressor two height sensors and two air springs supporting the rear axle The engine must be running for the system to operate and level the vehicle after loading
56. it from the DIC display SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM If a problem occurs with the brake system this message will appear on the DIC If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service SERVICE 4WD If a problem occurs with the four wheel drive system this message will appear on the DIC If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the four wheel drive system needs service SERVICE AIR SUSPENSION If a problem occurs with the suspension system this message will appear on the DIC If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the air suspension system needs service 2 107 TURN SIGNAL ON If a turn signal is left on for 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime Move the turn signal multifunction lever to the off position Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display REAR ACCESS OPEN If the liftgate is op
57. keyless entry system You can use your key to unlock your door from the outside You can lock or unlock the door from the inside by sliding the manual lever forward or rearward When the door is unlocked you can see a red area on the lever Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle won t open it You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren t locked So wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive Young children who get into unlocked The manual lever on each door works only that door s lock vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on the driver s and front passenger s armrests Press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors If the delayed locking feature is on the doors will not lock until they are all closed Press the lock switch twice to lock all of the doors immediately and override the delayed locking feature See Delayed Locking later in this section
58. let it idle to allow the transmission to cool This message will clear when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level 2 109 ICE POSSIBLE If the outside temperature reaches a level where ice could form on the roadway this message may appear on the DIC This message will clear after about 10 seconds Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display instantly DRIVER DOOR AJAR If the driver s door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstacles and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display PASSENGER DOOR AJAR If the passenger s door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstacles and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display 2 110 LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR If the driver s side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstacles a
59. little when the engine and radiator are hot The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark If the LOW COOLANT LEVEL message comes on and stays on it means you re low on engine coolant See Low Coolant in the Index Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the surge tank but only when the engine is cool You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine When replacing the pressure cap make sure it is hand tight 6 27 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully installed on the coolant surge tank NOTICE Your coolant surge tank pressure cap is a 15 psi 105 kPa pressure type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating 6 28 Power Steering Fluid When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for reservoir location How to Check Power Steering Fluid Turn the key off l
60. may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often THIRD 3 This position is also used for normal driving however it offers more power and lower fuel economy than DRIVE D 2 25 SECOND 2 This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy than THIRD 3 You can use SECOND 2 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on If you manually select SECOND 2 the transmission will drive in second gear You may use this feature for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces FIRST 1 This position gives you even more power but lower fuel economy than SECOND 2 You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is put in FIRST 1 while the vehicle is moving forward the transmission won t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough 2 26 NOTICE If your wheels can t rotate don t try to drive This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object You could damage your transmission Also if you stop when going uphill don t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal This could overheat and damage the transmission Use your brakes or shift into PARK P to hold your
61. next to the button will turn on The last selected PTY will appear on the display for five seconds P TYPE Program Type Knob Turn the P TYPE knob to select the PTY you want to listen to To use the PTY interrupt feature press and hold the P TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY you want to interrupt with When you are listening to a compact disc the last selected RDS station will interrupt play if that selected program type format is broadcast K SEEK SCAN gt Press an arrow to find radio stations for the PTY you want to listen to The last PTY selected will be used for seek or scan modes If a station with the selected PTY is not found NONE FOUND will appear on the display If both P TYPE and TRAF are on the radio will search for stations with the selected PTY and traffic announcements BAND Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type Press and hold BAND for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on AF ON will appear on the display The radio may switch to stronger stations Press and hold BAND again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off AF OFF will appear on the display The radio will not switch to other stations When you turn the ignition off and then on again the alternate frequency feature will be at the last setting selected Setting PTY Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite PTYs
62. of 90 F 32 C the system will remain at the maximum heat setting Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster 3 6 Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather the system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available The length of delay depends on the engine coolant temperature Pushing the fan switch will override this delay and change the fan to a selected speed Air Conditioning On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This reduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down Then keep your windows closed for the air conditioner to work its best On cool but sunny days while using manual operation of the automatic system use bi level to deliver warm air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets To warm or cool the air delivered turn the temperature knob to the desired setting In AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidify the air inside the vehicle Also while in AUTO mode the system will maximize its performance by using recirculation as necessary Heating On cold days when using manual operation of the the automatic system choose floor mode to deliver air to the floor outlets To warm or cool the air delivered turn the temperature knob to the desired
63. of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags 1 34 Air bag inflation doesn t prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle When an air bag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but can t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or door Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the air bags inflate if battery power is available You can lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by using the door lock and interior lamp controls In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag Let only qualified technicians work on your air windshields are broken by vehicle deformation bag system Improper service can mean that your Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the air bag system won t work properly See your dealer right front passenger air bag for service Air bags are designed to inflate only once After they inflate you ll need some new parts for your air bag system If you d
64. of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground use the steps that follow Always put the shift lever fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set If the transfer case on all wheel drive vehicles is in NEUTRAL your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you start your engine shift into a gear and release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you re pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid don t overfill engine oil axle lubricant belts cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to review these sections be
65. off On This position activates the system Resume Accelerate Push the lever to this symbol to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed 6 Set Press this button to set the speed 2 46 With cruise control you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h If you apply your brakes the cruise control will shut off Cruise control can be dangerous where you can t drive safely at a steady speed So don t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning and you could lose control Don t use cruise control on slippery roads Setting Cruise Control If you leave your cruise control switch on when you re not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don t want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control 1 Move the cruise control switch to on 2 Get up to the speed you want 3 Press in the set button at the end of the lever and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal The CRUISE light on the y instrument panel cluster will illuminate when
66. oil dipstick has a loop handle and is located on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you don t the oil dipstick might not show the actual level Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level The engine oil fill cap is located on the passenger s side valve cover See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location Se a Gee a When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the ADD mark then you ll need to add at least one quart of oil But you must use the right kind This part explains what kind of oil to use Bepe fouit za ough to put the level aE ewherein Si the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Cee igs se back in when you re through Specifications in the Index OTICE Don t add too much oil If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range your engine could be damaged 6 13 De E Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the starburst symbol This symbol indicates that the oil has
67. parts If you don t it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying kind of extension cord could overheat and cause to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you ll be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord won t reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 2 23 Automatic Transmission Operation Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission that features an electronic shift position indicator located within the instrument panel cluster There are several different positions for your shift lever PARK P This position locks your wheels It s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can t move easily It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly CAUTION Contin
68. pattern and additional information See footnote Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service 37 500 Miles 62 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 10 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Scheduled Maintenance 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace ACTUAL ne if ne i 7 3 p An Emission Control Service See footnote a Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 50 000 Miles 83 000 km hange automatic transmission fluid and if the vehicle is mainly driven under ACTUAL Bie more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly o hs reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service
69. remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear If the 4HI or 4HI Lock button is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4HI or 4HI Lock indicator light will flash for 15 seconds but will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 2 mph 3 2 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N Shifting to NEUTRAL To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL first make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll then do the following Set the parking brake Start the vehicle Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle Put the transmission in NEUTRAL N Shift the transfer case to 4HI Simultaneously press and hold the 4HI and 4LO Lock buttons for 10 seconds The NEUTRAL indicator light will come on when the transfer case shift to NEUTRAL is complete 7 Shift the transmission to REVERSE R for one DAunkwWNnN Se second then shift the transmission to DRIVE D for one second 8 Turn the ignition to LOCK 9 Place the transmission shift lever to PARK P 10 Release the parking brake prior to towing Shifting Out of NEUTRAL To shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL do the following 1 Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL N and turn the ignition to RUN with the engine off Press the button for the desired transfer case shift position 4HI 4HI Lock or 4LO Lock After the transfer case has sh
70. remain off when the doors are open To return the lamps to automatic operation press the button again and return the button to the out position With the button in this position the dome lamps will come on when you open a door Battery Run Down Protection This feature shuts off the dome reading glove box cargo and underhood lamps if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is off This will keep your battery from running down Mirrors Temperature and Compass Display Press the COMP or TEMP button briefly to turn the Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror comp temp display on or off with Compass and Temperature Display If the display reads CAL you will need to calibrate When on an electrochromic mirror automatically dims the compass For more information on calibration to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind see below you after dark To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius do the following 1 Press and hold the TEMP button for four seconds until either a flashing F or C appears 2 Press the button again to change the display to the desired unit of measurement After approximately four seconds of inactivity the new unit will be locked in and the compass temperature display will return The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper right corner of the mirror face The compass reading and the outside temperature will both appear in the display at the same time
71. safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for small adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide better positions the belt away from the neck and head Comfort guides are provided for each outside passenger in the second row seat and one guide for the single third row seat To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and booster seats and for smaller adults the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts Here s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt l Second Row Seat For the second row remove the guide from its storage clip on the trim panel near the side of the seatback 1 45 Third Row Seat For the third row remove the guide from its storage clip on the side of the seatback 2 Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide 1 46 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The guide must be on top of the belt Second Row Seat 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions earlier in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guides squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guides Make sure you remove the comfort guide from the belt before you fold a rear seat down 1 47
72. seat 3 Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the anchors in the vehicle The child restraint instructions will show you how If the child restraint is forward facing attach the top strap to the top strap anchor See Top Strap in the Index Tighten the top strap according to the child restraint instructions Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint simply unhook the top strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the anchor points 1 61 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children LATCH in the Index 1 62 You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Put the restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 3 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of p
73. set when your vehicle left the factory The default options are noted in the text following but may have been changed from their default state since then The driver s preferences can be recalled by pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter labeled 1 or 2 or by pressing the appropriate memory button 1 or 2 located on the driver s door Alarm Warning Type Press the personalization button until ALARM WARNING TYPE appears in the display To select your personalization for alarm warning type press the select button while ALARM WARNING TYPE is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices ALARM WARNING BOTH default The headlamps will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is active ALARM WARNING OFF There will be no alarm warning on activation ALARM WARNING HORN The horn will chirp when the alarm is active ALARM WARNING LAMPS The headlamps will flash when the alarm is active Choose one of the four options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on alarm warning type see Content Theft Deterrent in the Index 2 99 Automatic Locking Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC LOCKING appears in the display To select your personalization for automatic locking press the select button while AUTOMATIC LOCKING is displa
74. the Recovery Loops to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving Your vehicle is equipped with recovery loops at the front and rear You may need to use them if you re stuck off road and need 5 31 5 32 These loops when used are under a lot of force Always pull the vehicle straight out Never pull on the loops at a sideways angle The loops could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back NOTICE Never use the recovery loops to tow the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle This section begins with service and fuel information and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels There is also technical information about your vehicle and a part devoted to its appearance care Service Fuel Fuels in Foreign Countries Filling Your Tank Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood Engine Oil Engine Air Cleaner Filter Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear Axle All Wheel Drive Engine Coolant Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap Power Steering Fluid Windshield Washer Fluid DDDADDDADADDRDADDDDY WNNNNNNYRrFADADNWN OMDAMNWNONN 6 30 6 33 6 34 6 40 6 41 6 49 6 49 6 53 6 57 6 58 6 59 6 68 6 68 6 69 Brakes Battery Bulb Replacement Windshield Wiper Blade Repla
75. the button again Do not attach a temporary vehicle license tape or decals across the defogger grid on the rear window NOTICE Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp This may damage the defogger grid The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty Ventilation System Ventilation Tips For mild outside temperatures when little heating or Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice snow or cooling is needed use the panel outlet setting to direct any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and outside air through your vehicle Air will flow through defroster will work better reducing the chance of the instrument panel outlets fogging your windows Your vehicle s flow through ventilation system supplies e In cool damp weather minimize your use of outside air into the vehicle when it s moving When the recirculation to reduce the chance of fogging vehicle is not moving you can get outside air to flow your windows through by selecting any air delivery mode and any Keep the air path under the front seats clear of fan speed objects This helps air to circulate throughout l i your vehicle Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the e Adding outside equipment to the front of your direction and amount of vehicle such as hood air deflectors etc may affect airflow inside the vehicle the performance o
76. the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They re a big help Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center DIC that works along with the warning lights and gages See Driver Information Center DIC in the Index Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN a chime will come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts unless the driver s safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds then it will flash for several more If the driver s belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the air bag symbol The system checks the air bag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the air bag sensors the air bag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the air bag system see Air Bag in the Index This light will come on when you start your vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds Then the light should go out This means the system is ready If the air bag readi
77. the seatback locks into the upright position Removing the Third Row Seat To remove the third row seat do the following 1 Open the liftgate 2 Fold the seatback forward onto the seat cushion by using the lever labeled 1 The seat cannot be removed unless the seatback is folded 1 Pull the lever labeled 3 toward you 2 While still holding the lever 3 toward you grasp the top of the seat and pull it toward you slightly 3 Let go of lever 3 and pull the seat completely down fe To unlatch the rear of the seat from the floor pull up on the release lever labeled 2 located at the rear of the seat and lift the rear of the seat up off of the floor 4 Squeeze the release handle while pulling the seat out 5 While holding the rear of the seat up roll the seat out of the vehicle 5 Replacing the Third Row Single Seat To replace the third row single seat do the following 1 Open the liftgate 2 While holding the rear of the seat up slide the front wheels into the slots on the floor The front latches should lock into place If latches do not lock try tilting the rear of the seat upwards If the seatback isn t locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked 3 Once the latches are engaged let the seat drop into place Pull the lever labeled 1 and pull the seatbac
78. the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground use the steps that follow With all wheel drive if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Press the button on the end of the shift lever 2 33 While still pressing the button move the lever forward as far as it will go Let go of the button and the lever 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand your vehicle is in PARK P 2 34 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set With your transfer case in NEUTRAL your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Don t leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill
79. to select the desired preset equalization setting while playing a compact disc The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a compact disc See AUTO EQ listed previously for more information K SEEK gt To seek press the left arrow while playing a CD to go to the start of the current track if more than ten seconds have passed Press the right arrow to go to the next track If you press the button more than once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the disc K SCAN gt To scan one disc press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep Use this feature to listen to each track of the currently selected disc for ten seconds Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning To scan all loaded discs press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep Use this feature to listen to the first track for ten seconds for each disc loaded Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning RCL Recall Push this knob to see how long the current track has been playing To change what is normally shown on the display track or elapsed time push this knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob until the display flashes BAND Press this button to play the radio when a disc s is in the player Using Song List Mode The integrated six disc C
80. to the spare tire mounting plate Loosen the wing nuts holding the extension to the spare tire plate and remove it The extension attaches to the front receiver exactly as the power winch platform does See Power Winch Platform following in this section Attach the accessory you will be using to the receiver extension 4 71 Power Winch Platform If Equipped You can use the power winch platform with an aftermarket winch Connect the winch to the platform and wiring to the vehicle following the winch manufacturer s guidelines 1 Slide the winch platform into the front receiver of your vehicle To secure it follow the next step You will be using the locking pin included with the jack tool kit See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index for more information on location 2 Slide the pin down through the hole in the front bumper and into the receiver 4 72 If you look under the receiver you will see the locking portion clip of the pin coming through the bottom hole in the receiver Turn the clip so that it is perpendicular to the pin Pin is shown off of the vehicle for clarity Push the clip so it locks in place Pin is shown off of the vehicle for clarity With the clip locked and the pin secure your setup should look like this if you look under the receiver The pin is now secure and you will be able to use the winch To remove the winch platform you must
81. transmission to PARK P But do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL Leave the transfer case in the 4HI 4HI Lock or 4LO Lock position 4 31 Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill you ll want to consider a number of things How steep is the downhill Will I be able to maintain Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause vehicle control your brakes to overheat and fade This could cause loss of control and a serious accident Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control What s the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery Hard packed dirt Gravel e Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts Logs Boulders What s at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks If you decide you can go down a hill safely then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down and use a low gear This way engine drag can help your brakes and they won t have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping your vehicle under control at all times 4 32 Q Are there some things I should not do when Q Am I likely to stall when going downhill sas 9 coe coat A It s much more likely to happen going uphill But if A Yes These are important because if you ignore it happens going downhill here s what to do them you could lose control and have a serious accident When driving downhill avoid
82. turns that take you across the incline of the hill A hill that s not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across You could roll over if you don t drive straight down Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL N This is called free wheeling Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes Apply the parking brake Shift to PARK P and while still braking restart the engine Shift back to a low gear release the parking brake and drive straight down If the engine won t start get out and get help 4 33 Driving Across an Incline Sooner or later an off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill If this happens you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline Here are some things to consider e A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across When you go straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end But when you drive across an incline the much more narrow track width the distance between the left and right wheels may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over Also driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover e Surface conditions can be a
83. up to starting and better fuel economy during engine 15 seconds When the engine starts let go of the key warm up Usually the coolant heater should be 2 If your engine still won t start or starts but then stops plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try your vehicle At temperatures above 32 F 0 C pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor use of the coolant heater is not required and holding it there as you hold the key in START for F about three seconds When the engine starts let go of To Use the Engine Coolant Heater the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but 1 Turn off the engine then stops again do the same thing but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds This clears the extra gasoline from the engine NOTICE Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located on the driver s side of the vehicle near the front recovery loop parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you don t your engine might not perform properly 2 22 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine
84. 00 000 miles 166 000 km should be repeated after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals for the life of this vehicle The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be repeated at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km for the life of this vehicle See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Footnotes The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule 7 5 Scheduled Maintenance Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication Scheduled Maintenance Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the GM Oil Life System or every 12 months whichever occurs first Reset the system Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably
85. 18 Cassette Tape Messages CHK TAPE Check Tape If CHK TAPE appears on the radio display the tape won t play because of one of the following errors The tape is tight and the player can t turn the tape hubs Remove the tape Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil Turn the tape over and repeat If the hubs do not turn easily your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly The tape is broken Try a new tape The tape is wrapped around the tape head Attempt to get the cassette out Try a new tape CLEAN If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected contact your dealer CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player To activate the bypass feature perform the following steps 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five seconds The radio will display READY and the tape symbol on the display will flash indicating the feature is active 4 I
86. 2 53 Electrochromic Mirror Operation The electrochromic self dimming mirror function is turned on automatically each time the ignition is started To operate the electrochromic mirror do the following 1 Make sure the green indicator light located to the left of the COMP button is lit If it s not press and hold the TEMP button for six seconds until the green light comes on indicating that the mirror is in electrochromic self dimming mode 2 Turn off the electrochromic mirror function by pressing and holding the TEMP button for six seconds until the green indicator light turns off Compass Variance The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside of zone eight Under certain circumstances as during a long distance cross country trip it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance Compass variance is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If not adjusted to account for compass variance your compass could give false readings 2 54 To adjust for compass variance do the following 1 2 Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map Press and hold the COMP button for nine seconds or until a Z and a zone number appears in the display The compass is now in zone mode 3 Keep pressing the COMP button until the desired zone number
87. 42 A and a departure angle of 37 B ci A A WA 4 20 Design specifications required a minimum gradeability of 60 31 slope with the vehicle fully loaded on high friction surfaces at 6 mph 9 7 km h Also specifications required that the HUMMER H2 The HUMMER H2 can climb a 16 inch 40 6 cm be able to traverse a 40 22 side slope at 6 mph vertical step 9 7 km h while fully loaded on high friction surfaces 4 21 Brake and Throttle Modulation for Enhanced Mobility The use of this technique will give the driver the ability to traverse challenging obstacles with more confidence safety and care to both the vehicle and the terrain It allows the driver to gain control of the vehicle systems and place power and wheel torque where it is needed most This is how it works For logs walls rocks severe ditches etc 1 2 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop Do not overspeed the engine Select the proper transmission and transfer case gear range usually FIRST 1 gear 4LO Lock for such obstacles 4 22 If wheel spin is experienced let up on the throttle to slow the wheel spin Slowly press the brake pedal with your left foot so all wheel spin is halted With the brake still applied start pressing the throttle As the engine gains power gradually reduce the pressure applied to the brake You can feel torque being d
88. Beam Right Not Used Relay Not Used Horn Relay Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump Relay Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump OnStar Radio Amplifier Not Used Horn Not Used All Wheel Drive Module Not Used 6 67 Replacement Bulbs Bulb Number Low Beam and High Beam Headlamps 9007 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 4157K or 3157KX Front Parking and Turn Lamp 4157K or 3157KX Rear Taillamp and Stop Lamp 3157 Rear Turn Lamp 002 3157 Back up Lamp 4157 or 3157 Center Roof Marker Lamp 168 Corner Roof Marker Lamp 168 For replacement bulbs not listed here please consult your dealer 6 68 Capacities and Specifications Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for more information All capacities are approximate Engine s scesshi5 esis oe ade ttle VORTEC 6000 DY Per E AEN oh Sigs ANE utah an V8 MIN Code siaran aa e oe aoe eet es U Spark Plug Gap 0 060 inches 1 52 mm Wheels and Tires Wheel Nut Torque 140 Ib ft 190 N m Tire Pressure See the Certification Tire label on the rear edge of the driver s door Capacities Cooling System 14 8 quarts 14 0 L Engine Oil with Filter Capacity 6 0 quarts 5 7 L Fuel Tank 32 0 gallons 121 0 L Air Conditioning Refrigerant Capacity If you do
89. Center Passenger Position Lap Belt When you sit in the center seating position you have a lap safety belt which has no retractor To make the belt longer tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt 1 48 To make the belt shorter pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug Buckle position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle Infants and Young Children Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by the appropriate restraint Young children should not use the vehicle s safety belts unless there is no other choice 1 49 For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 lb 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on a person s arms A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint People should never
90. Cigarette Lighter The ashtray is removable and fits into the front cupholder NOTICE If you store paper or other things that burn in your ashtray they could be set on fire by cigarettes or other smoking materials That could cause a fire and possibly damage your vehicle Do not store papers and other things that burn in the ashtray The cigarette lighter is located on the instrument panel below the OnStar buttons To use the cigarette lighter push it in all the way and let go When it s ready it will pop back out by itself To use the lighter push it in all the way and let it go When it s ready it will pop back out by itself NOTICE Holding a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it s heating can make it overload damaging the lighter and the heating element Just push the lighter all the way in and let go When it s done it will pop back out by itself Sun Visors To block out glare you can swing down the top and bottom visors You can also swing the bottom visor from side to side The visors also have an extension that can be pulled out for additional glare protection Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps 2 63 Accessory Inflator If Equipped Your vehicle may have an air inflator system The air inflator is capable of re inflating the vehicle s tires if they have been deflated You can also inflate things like ba
91. D changer has a feature called song list This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections To save tracks into the song list feature perform the following steps 1 Turn the disc player on and load it with at least one disc See LOAD CD listed previously in this section for more information 2 Check to see that the disc changer is not in song list mode S LIST should not appear in the display If S LIST is present press the SONG LIST button to turn it off 3 29 3 Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right arrow button to locate the track that you want to save The track will begin to play 4 Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or more seconds to save the track into memory After two seconds of pressing SONG LIST continuously one beep will sound to confirm that the track has been saved 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections If you attempt to save more than 20 selections S LIST FULL will appear on the display To play the song list press the SONG LIST button S LIST will appear on the display The recorded tracks will begin to play in the order that they were saved You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK SCAN arrows Seeking past the last saved track will return you to the first saved track To delete tracks from the song list perform the following steps 1 Turn the disc player on 2 Press the SONG LIST button
92. E appears on the display To accept the RDS time and to update the radio press the hour and minute buttons at the same time for longer than two seconds If the time is not available from the station NO UPDATE or NO UPDAT will appear on the display instead RDS time is broadcast once a minute Once you have tuned to an RDS broadcast station it may take a few minutes for your time to update AM FM with Cassette Tape and Compact Disc Player with Radio Data System RDS and Automatic Tone Control Bose Playing the Radio PWR Power Press this knob to turn the system on and off VOL Volume Turn this knob to increase or to decrease volume AUTO VOL Automatic Volume Your audio system monitors the noise inside your vehicle To use automatic volume press the AUTO VOL button until AVOL ON appears on the display Then automatic volume will automatically adjust the volume of your radio so that it always sounds the same to you To turn the automatic volume off press the AUTO VOL button until AVOL OFF appears on the display DISP Display Press this button to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time Time display is available with the ignition turned off Finding a Station BAND Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display will show your selection TUNE Turn this knob to choose radio stations lt A SEEK P Press the right or the left arrow to seek to the next or to th
93. ICE When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Don t mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water doesn t clean as well as washer fluid Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it s very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Don t use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint 6 29 Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for the location of the reservoir There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won t work well or won t work at all 6 30 So it isn t a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid won t correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you ll have too much fluid wh
94. INE OIL AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS RECOMMENDED Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance procedures are important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition please maintain your vehicle properly Maintenance Requirements Maintenance intervals checks inspections and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow recommended maintenance may not be covered by warranty How This Section is Organized This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services explains what to have done and how often Some of these services can be complex so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should let your dealer s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs Per
95. NOTICE Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they ll have to be replaced Don t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Appearance Care in the Index 6 31 Brake Wear Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won t work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair 6 32 Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten whee
96. Sunroof Option 2 35 Shifting Out of PARK P 2 71 HomeLink Transmitter 2 36 Parking Over Things That Burn 2 76 Instrument Panel Your Information System 2 36 Engine Exhaust 2 78 Instrument Panel Cluster 2 37 Running Your Engine While You re Parked 2 80 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 2 95 Driver Information Center DIC Windows Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous A child can be overcome by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather Power Windows The controls for the power windows are located on the armrest on each of the side doors The switches operate the windows when the ignition is in RUN ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power in the Index The driver s door has a switch for each of the passenger s windows as well Press the top of the switch to lower the window Pull up the top of the switch to raise the window Express Down Window The driver s and front passenger s window switches have an express down feature that allows you to lower the window without continuously pressing the switch Press the top of the window switch down briefly to activate the feature Lightly tap the switch to open the window slightly The express down feature can be interrupted at any time by p
97. TR A C LOCK HVAC 1 L DOOR CRUISE UNLOCK RR FOG LP BRAKE PDM IGN 0 TBC IGN 0 VEH CHMSL LT TRLR ST TRN Usage Four Wheel Drive Switch Electronically Controlled Air Suspension Switch Module Not Used Power Door Lock Relay Inside Rearview Mirror Climate Control System Harness Connector Cruise Control Power Door Unlock Relay Not Used Brake Switch Passenger Door Module Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Powertrain Control Module Transmission Truck Body Controller Vehicle and Trailer Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Left Turn Signal Stop Trailer NAME LT TRN VEH STOP BODY RT TRLR ST TRN RT TRN DDM AUX PWR 2 LOCKS ECC TBC 2C FLASH CB LT DOORS TBC 2B TBC 2A Usage Left Turn Signals and Sidemarkers Vehicle Stoplamps Brake Module Electronic Throttle Control Module Harness Connector Right Turn Signal Stop Trailer Right Turn Signals and Sidemarkers Driver Door Module Instrument Panel and Rear Cargo Area Power Outlets Rear Doors and Liftgate Power Lock Relay Feed Not Used Truck Body Controller Flasher Module Left Rear Power Window Circuit Breaker and Driver Door Module Truck Body Controller Truck Body Controller 6 61 Center Instrument Panel Utility Block The center instrument panel utility block is located underneath the instrument panel to the left of the steering column f a _2 1 D KG D A UPFIT A SL RIDE A HDLNR 2
98. Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You don t need to add water to the ACDelco battery installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you don t explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Don t get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables don t have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Don t connect positive to negative or you ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Don t let the other end touch metal Connect it t
99. Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it s about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have an anti lock braking system you ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock in the Index Allow greater following distance on any slippery road Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot that s covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can t reach around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you re actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers 4 51 If You re Caught in a Blizzard Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you ve been stopped by the snow Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you have no blankets or extra clothing
100. a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic 4 13 Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you re awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you re following a larger vehicle Also you won t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don t get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone isn t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot 4 14 Check your mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that if your r
101. a large or heavy load as when the vehicle is unloaded Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load Your vehicle is equipped with a button on the instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel which when pressed enables tow haul a 7 When the button is pressed this light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that tow haul has been selected Tow haul may be turned off by pressing the button again at which time the indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off The vehicle will automatically turn off tow haul every time it is started TOW HAUL Tow haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle s Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR See Weight of the Trailer later in this section Tow haul is most useful under the following driving conditions When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and go traffic When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in busy parking lots where improved low speed control of the vehicle is desired Operating the vehicle in tow haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause damage However there is no benefit to the selection of tow haul when the vehicle is
102. ace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH system safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system wasn t being used at the time of the collision If an air bag inflates you ll need to replace air bag system parts See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section Section 2 Features and Controls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle and information on starting shifting and braking Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly and what to do if you have a problem 2 2 Windows 2 38 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension 2 3 Keys System If Equipped 2 6 Door Locks 2 39 Selectable Extended Rear Ride Height 2 11 Keyless Entry System If Equipped 2 15 Liftgate 2 41 Locking Rear Axle 2 16 Theft 2 42 Tilt Wheel 2 17 Content Theft Deterrent 2 42 Horn 2 19 Passlock 2 42 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever 2 19 New Vehicle Break In 2 49 Exterior Lamps 2 20 Ignition Positions 2 51 Interior Lamps 2 21 Starting Your Engine 2 53 Mirrors 2 22 Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped 2 57 Storage Compartments 2 24 Automatic Transmission Operation 2 63 Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter 2 28 All Wheel Drive 2 65 Accessory Power Outlets 2 32 Parking Brake 2 66 OnStar System If Equipped 2 33 Shifting Into PARK P 2 70
103. ad recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil ask your dealer a service station or a local recycling center for help Engine Air Cleaner Filter NOTICE Do not spray water into the engine air cleaner intake arrow If too much water enters the engine air cleaner filter housing it could cause severe damage to your vehicle s engine This damage wouldn t be covered under your vehicle s warranty The engine air cleaner filter assembly is located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location To replace the engine air cleaner filter do the following 1 Loosen both screws on the cover of the housing and lift up the cover _ 3 S e ____ _ 6 17 Pull the air cleaner filter up and out from the housing Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible Clean the filter sealing surface and the housing 4 Ds Install the new engine air cleaner filter Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the engine air cleaner filter See Owner Checks and Services in the Index 6 18 Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops flame if the
104. adlamp system turn the exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the instrument panel Be sure it is not covered or the system will be on whenever the ignition is on The system may also turn on your headlamps when driving through a parking garage heavy overcast weather or a tunnel This is normal There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay 2 50 Lamps On Reminder If a door is open a reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and your key is out of the ignition To turn off the chime turn the headlamp switch to off or AUTO and then back on In the automatic mode the headlamps turn off once the ignition is in LOCK and the headlamps on at exit delay ends if enabled in the DIC Daytime Running Lamps Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset Fully functional daytime running lam
105. advice anyone can give about driving is Drive defensively Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle Buckle up See Safety Belts in the Index gt Defensive driving really means be ready for anything On city streets rural roads or freeways it means always expect the unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do Be ready for their mistakes Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance It s the best defensive driving maneuver in both city and rural driving You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call reading or reaching for something on the floor makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do things like this or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It s the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol a
106. ailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you 4 66 Making Turns NOTICE Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well You can tow in DRIVE D You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the tran
107. air bag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag sensors If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure in the Index 1 41 Rear Seat Passengers Lap Shoulder Belt It s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up The positions next to the windows have lap shoulder Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear belts Here s how to wear one properly seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who aren t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions 1 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted The lap shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 1 42 2 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again If the belt is not long enough s
108. al battery s label We recommend an ACDelco battery See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for battery location WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Vehicle Storage If you re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep your battery from running down Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you aren t careful See Jump Starting in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods Also for your audio system see Theft Deterrent Feature in the Index 6 33 Bulb Replacement For any bulb changing procedure not listed here contact your dealer For the proper types of bulbs to use see Replacement Bulbs in the Index Halogen Bulbs Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package 6 34 Headlamps 1 Open the hood as described earlier in this section and locate the affected headlamp on the inner front portion of the hood Turn the bulb socket
109. al playing speed Release it to play the passage The display will show ET and the elapsed time 4 FWD Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly within a track Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing speed Press and hold it for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the normal playing speed Release it to play the passage The display will show ET and the elapsed time 6 RDM Random Press this pushbutton to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order RDM ON will appear on the display RDM T and the track number will appear on the display when each track starts to play Press this pushbutton again to turn off random play RDM OFF will appear on the display lt qSEEK gt Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current or to the previous track Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track If either arrow is held or pressed more then once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD 3 20 lt A SCAN Press and hold one of the arrows for more than two seconds SCAN will be displayed and the radio will produce one beep Use this feature to listen to each track for 10 seconds Press either arrow again to stop scanning DISP Display Press this knob to see how long the current track has been playing ET and the elapsed time will appear on the display To change what is normally shown on the d
110. an be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking See Drunken Driving in the Index 4 25 Crossing Obstacles Approach Angle a Key to Mobility If you encounter a large dip in the terrain do not enter straight on enter at an angle 15 minimum approach A 75 maximum approach angle B For very large dips ditches or small washes coast in using the engine as a brake Then use the low ranges in the transmission and transfer case to power out yor rt rpyprpilt ey aa S 4 26 Roll Your Tires Over Large Rocks Do not straddle large rocks drive over them letting the tire envelop the rock The tread of the tire is thicker and tougher than the sidewall of the tire and is more resilient to impact than underbody components Log Crossing Using the proper technique the Driving on Off Road Hills HUMMER H2 will cross logs up to 12 inches 30 5 cm in diameter Approach the log at approximately a Off road driving often takes you up down or across a 15 angle A with the transfer case in 4LO Lock and hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and walk the HUMMER H2 over one tire at a time an understanding of what your vehicle can and can t do As with all obstacles face your tires perpendicular to the object for best traction and tire life It may be nece
111. an indicate a serious problem See Low Coolant Message in the Index If you get an engine overheat warning with no low coolant message but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you Climb a long hill on a hot day Stop after high speed driving Idle for long periods in traffic e Tow a trailer See Driving on Grades in the Index If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 In heavy traffic let the engine idle in neutral while stopped If it is safe to do so pull off the road shift to park or neutral and let the engine idle 2 Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning doesn t come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues and you have not stopped pull over stop and park your vehicle right away If there s still no sign of steam you can push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you re parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down Also see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode listed previously in this section You may decide no
112. and Wire Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels and Wheel Cleaner wire wheel covers Finish Enhancer Removes dust fingerprints and surface contaminants Spray on wipe off Swirl Remover Polish Removes swirl marks fine scratches and other light surface contamination Removes light scratches and protects finish Foaming Tire Cleans shines and protects in one easy step Shine Low Gloss No wiping necessary Medium foaming shampoo Cleans and lightly waxes Wash Wax Concentrate Biodegradable and phosphate free Spot Lifter Quickly and easily removes spots and stains from carpets vinyl and cloth upholstery See your General Motors parts department for these products See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 6 57 Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UX1M072675 au This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code This code will help you identify your engine specifications and replacement parts 6 58 Service Parts Identification Label You ll find this label located in the glove box It s very helpful if you ever need to order parts On this
113. and you don t shift your transmission into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into PARK P in the Index When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P Shifting Out of PARK P Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN See Automatic Transmission in the Index If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you want If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can t shift out of PARK P try this 1 Turn the key to LOCK Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 Shift the vehicle to NEUTRAL N Start the vehicle and then shift to t
114. ansmitter to work try this Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary See the instructions that follow If you re still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for service 2 12 Operation A Unlock Pressing this button once will unlock the driver s door The interior lamps will come on Pressing unlock again within three seconds will cause the remaining doors to unlock You can choose different feedback options for each press of the unlock button such as having the vehicle s perimeter lamps come on and or have the horn chirp See DIC in the Index for more information Lock Pressing this button once will lock all of the doors Pressing the button again within three seconds may cause the horn to chirp to confirm that the doors have locked You can choose different feedback options for each press of the lock button such as having the vehicle s perimeter lamps flash and or have the horn chirp See Driver Information Center DIC in the Index for more information V Panic When the button with the horn symbol on the key transmitter is pressed the horn will sound and the hea
115. ant surge tank pressure cap off start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fan By this time the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark 5 17 Engine Fan Noise Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan When the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In most everyday driving conditions the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages So you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling system functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine It will go away as the fan clutch partially disengages 5 18 If a Tire Goes Flat It s unusual for a tire to blow out while you re driving especially if you maintain your tires properly If air goes out of a tire it s much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blo
116. apped in the vehicle after an accident if I m wearing a safety belt You could be whether you re wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you re upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted If my vehicle has air bags why should I have to wear safety belts Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you re in a vehicle that has air bags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That s true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions Q If Pm a good driver and I never drive far from A home why should I wear safety belts You may be an excellent driver but if you re in an accident even one that isn t your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver doesn t protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone 1 21 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people o
117. aren t marked Curves aren t banked There are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill or downhill In short you ve gone right back to nature Off road driving involves some new skills And that s why it s very important that you read this guide You Il find many driving tips and suggestions These will help make your off road driving safer and more enjoyable 4 16 Before You Go Off Roading There are some things to do before you go out For example be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done Check to make sure all underbody shields are properly attached Be sure you read all the information about your four wheel drive vehicle in this manual Is there enough fuel Is the spare tire fully inflated Are the fluid levels up where they should be What are the local laws that apply to off roading where you ll be driving If you don t know you should check with law enforcement people in the area Will you be on someone s private land If so be sure to get the necessary permission Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle The heaviest things should be on the load floor and Cargo on the load floor piled higher than forward of your rear axle Put heavier items as far the seatbacks can be thrown forward forward as you can during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below th
118. assist the proper authorities Roadside Assistance with Location For vehicle breakdowns press the OnStar Services button An advisor will contact the appropriate help 2 67 Remote Diagnostics If an instrument panel light comes on press the OnStar Services button An advisor can perform a check of the engine on board computer and recommend what action needs to be taken OnStar MED NET Med Net can store your personal medical history and provide it to emergency personnel if necessary Requires activation and an additional fee Accident Assist An advisor can provide step by step guidance following an accident Remote Door Unlock To contact the center call 1 888 4 ONSTAR You will be required to provide your security information An advisor will send a command to your vehicle to unlock itself The advisor can delay unlocking your vehicle Remote Door Unlock is disabled 48 hours after the vehicle is parked to maintain the battery charge 2 68 Vehicle Locator Service To contact the center call 1 888 4 ONSTAR You will be required to provide your security information An advisor will send a command to your vehicle to sound the horn and or flash the lamps Route Support An advisor can provide directions or guidance to most places you want to go In addition they can help you locate gas stations rest areas ATMs hospitals hotels stores eateries and more Ride Assist An advisor can locate transportation in the
119. at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you The belt is buckled in the wrong place 1 25 Q What s wrong with this A The belt is over an armrest 1 26 You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this The belt would be much too high In a crash you can slide under the belt The belt force would then be applied at the abdomen not at the pelvic bones and that could cause serious or fatal injuries Be sure the belt goes under the armrests Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which aren t as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 27 Q What s wrong with this CY 3 Z Oe in Dand De py al The belt is twisted across the body 1 28 You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make
120. attach it to the regular safety belt Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance 1 75 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible 1 76 If you ve had a crash do you need new belts or LATCH system parts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new parts If the LATCH system was being used during a more severe crash you may need new LATCH system parts If belts are cut or damaged repl
121. aused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can 6 59 Instrument Panel Fuse Block The fuse block access door is on the driver s side end of the instrument panel Pull off the cover to access the fuse block You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor which is mounted to the fuse block access door To remove fuses if you don t have a fuse extractor hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse block access door These can be used to replace a bad fuse However make sure it is of the correct amperage 6 60 Cavs an IGNO VEH STOP DDM Ecc ECC CB LT DOORS l Cad ea Erre auxrwr2 rocks Ceca Cea NAME RR WIPER SEO ACCY WS WPR TBC ACCY IGN 3 Usage Rear Window Wiper Switch Not Used Windshield Wipers Truck Body Controller Accessory Rear Heated Seats Modules NAME 4WD H
122. below by name Washer Solvent or equivalent part number or specification may be obtained from 7 3 Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid your dealer System GM Part No U S 1052884 USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT in Canada 993294 or equivalent Engine Oil Engine oil with the American Automatic DEXRON III Automatic Petroleum Institute Certified Transmission Transmission Fluid for Gasoline Engines starburst Multi Purpose symbol of the proper viscosity Lubricant Superlube To determine Me prererreg GM Part No U S 12346241 viscosity for your vehicle s engine see Engine Oil in the Index in Canada 10953474 or equivalent Chassis Chassis Lubricant Lubrication GM Part No U S 12377985 in Canada 88901242 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB Hydraulic Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or or GC LB Brake System equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid Engine Coolant 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and use only DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant in the Index 7 22 USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Front and Rear Axle Transfer Case Hood Hinges SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 12378261 in Canada 10953455 or equivalent meeting GM Specification 9986115 DEXRON III Automatic Transmission Fluid Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No U S 12346241 in Canada 10953474 or equivalent USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Ou
123. bered pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to play A small bar will appear under the CD number that is playing and the track number will appear If an error appears on the radio display see Compact Disc Messages later in this section CD A Eject Pressing the CD eject side of this button will eject a single disc or multiple discs To eject the disc that is currently playing press and release this button To eject multiple discs press and hold this button for two seconds You will hear a beep and the light will flash to let you know when a disc is being ejected 3 27 REMOVE CD will be displayed You can now remove the disc If the disc is not removed after 25 seconds the disc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver If you try to push the disc back into the receiver before the 25 second time period is complete the receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the disc several times before stopping Do not repeatedly press the CD eject side of the LOAD CD eject button to eject a disc after you have tried to push it in manually The receiver s 25 second eject timer will reset at each press of eject which will cause the receiver to not eject the disc until the 25 second time period has elapsed Once the player stops and the disc is ejected remove the disc After removing the disc press the PWR knob off and then on again This will clear the disc sensing feature and enable discs to be loaded
124. brake The light will flash if the parking brake doesn t release fully If you try to drive with the parking brake engaged a chime will sound Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part isn t working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light and chime come on there could be a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away OC T BRAKE United States Canada This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If it doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push Or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service 2 85 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light With the anti lock brake system this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds That s nor
125. by turning the ignition to RUN The locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you are leaving the program mode If the lock unlock switches are not pressed while in the programming mode the current auto lock unlock setting will not be modified See your dealer for more information Delayed Locking When locking the doors with the power lock switch or the keyless entry transmitter and any of the doors or the liftgate is open the delayed locking feature will delay locking the doors and tailgate until five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the keyless entry transmitter twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back on again by doing the following 1 With the driver door open press and hold the power door lock switch in the lock position 2 Press unlock twice on the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition 2 10 Rear Door Security Locks With this feature you can lock the rear doors so they cannot be opened from the inside by passengers To use one of these locks do the following 1 Open one of the rear doors You will find a security lock located on the inside edge of each rear door
126. can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant NOTICE In cold weather water can freeze and crack the Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise left engine radiator heater core and other parts about one full turn If you hear a hiss wait for that Use the recommended coolant and the proper to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left coolant mixture 5 15 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and 3 Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper remove it mixture to the FULL COLD mark 5 16 5 Then replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated 4 With the cool
127. ce last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 15 Part B Owner Checks and Services Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Part D At Each Fuel Fill It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil in the Index for further details 7 16 Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant in the Index for further details Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary See Windshield Washer Fluid in the Index f
128. cement Tires Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Vehicle Identification Number VIN Electrical System Replacement Bulbs Capacities and Specifications Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you ll go to your dealer for all your service needs You ll get genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work you ll want to use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record in the Index You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work ona vehicle without knowing enough about it Besure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any v
129. ck constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 82 500 Miles 137 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY oa 7 13 Scheduled Maintenance 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation
130. cle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you re stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Don t spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer 5 30 NOTICE Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth you can destroy your transmission See Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out For information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains in the Index Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First turn your steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around your front wheels Your vehicle has a Traction Control System You should press the TC2 button with the transfer case in any mode except 4HI See Traction Control System in the Index for more information Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that doesn t get you out after a few tries you may need to be towed out Or you can use your recovery loops If you do need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle in the Index Using
131. cles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you re not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Here are some things to consider Is the path ahead clear Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead Does the travel take you uphill or downhill There s more discussion of these subjects later Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you re not prepared When you drive over bumps rocks or other obstacles your wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you can t control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it s especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking In a way off road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what isn t Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road And this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment c
132. could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle See Engine Exhaust in the Index Fuel System Inspection Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks Engine Cooling System Inspection Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace as needed Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year Transfer Case and Front Axle Brake System Inspection All Wheel Drive Inspection Inspect the complete system Inspect brake lines and Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals check hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and necessary A fluid loss could indicate a problem check rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts and have it repaired if needed Check vent hose at including calipers parking brake etc You may need to transfer case for kinks and proper installation More have your brakes inspected more often if your driving frequent lubrication may be required on off road use habits or conditions result in frequent braking 7 21 Part D Recommended Fluids USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT and Lubricants Windshield GM Optikleen Washer Solvent Fluids and lubricants identified
133. ction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you ll understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you re in a curve speed is the one factor you can control Suppose you re steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control Refer to Traction Control System in the Index What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you ll want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway 4 11 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more e
134. ction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index Filling a Portable Fuel Container Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others Dispense gasoline only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Don t smoke while pumping gasoline Checking Things Under the Hood Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine Hood Release To open the hood do the following 1 Release both hood side latches 2 Pull the handle located on the lower part of the instrument panel 6 9 3 Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull the assist handles toward you to lift the hood 4 Pull the hood open until it is supported by the cab
135. ctions on the hill that can block your path boulders trees logs or ruts What s beyond the hill Is there a cliff an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you don t know It s the smart way to find out Is the hill simply too rough Steep hills often have ruts gullies troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion Driving Uphill Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill you need to take some special steps Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed Don t use more power than you need because you don t want your wheels to start spinning or sliding Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible If the path twists and turns you might want to find another route Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sideways and possibly roll over You could be seriously injured or killed When driving up hills always try to go straight up Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you re there Use your headlamps even during the day They make you more visible to oncoming traffic Driving to the top crest of a
136. d height has been reached of the hill or prevent the vehicle from grounding out this may take up to a minute the warning light will high centering on the crest of the hill stop flashing and will stay lit while the vehicle is at the extended height Do not use this feature when towing a trailer 2 40 Locking Rear Axle The locking rear axle can give you additional traction from the rear wheels when you are driving in off road situations such as mud snow sand steep hills and uneven terrain The button used to turn this feature on or off is located above the transfer case buttons to the right of the steering wheel To lock the rear axle do the following 1 Place the transfer case in the 4LO Lock mode This is the only mode which will allow you to lock the rear axle See All Wheel Drive in the Index for more information regarding the transfer case 2 Press the button with the vehicle stopped or moving less than 2 mph 3 km h You must wait for the light in the button to stop flashing and remain illuminated before the rear axle is locked Driving forward a few feet at less than 2 mph 3 km h may also help to engage the rear axle NOTICE Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is stuck and the tires are spinning You can damage drivetrain components and this damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty Lock the rear axle before attempting situations or navigating terrain which could p
137. des CD holder slots until it latches to close the door and a tissue holder which is located on the inside of the The overhead consoles also include the reading lamps console lid described earlier the HomeLink transmitter and the sunroof button if equipped described later in this section 2 58 Rear Armrest Cupholders Your vehicle is equipped with a rear armrest cupholder for the rear seat passengers To open it pull up and then out on the tab located at the top center of the armrest and pull the armrest down First Aid Kit If Equipped Your vehicle may have a first aid kit located in the storage bin behind the spare tire It is held in with straps Tool Kit If Equipped Your vehicle may have a tool kit located in the storage bin behind the spare tire It is held in with straps Cargo Tie Downs There are two cargo tie downs located on the inside of the liftgate in the rear of the vehicle to secure cargo inside the vehicle with the liftgate closed 2 59 Luggage Carrier If Equipped Adjusting the Crossrails The luggage carrier allows you to load cargo on top Adjust the crossrails to fit your load by doing the following of your vehicle It consists of siderails and crossrails The crossrails can be moved forward or backward to accommodate various cargo sizes NOTICE Loading cargo that weighs more than 300 Ibs 660 kg on the luggage carrier can damage your vehicle When you carry things never l
138. djust your mirrors and set the radio station presets 2 Press and hold the 1 or 2 for driver 1 or 2 button of the memory control for three seconds A double chime will sound to let you know that the position has been stored To repeat the procedure for a second driver follow the preceding steps but press the other number of the memory control The memory feature only works when the transmission is in PARK P 1 4 To recall memory seat mirror positions and radio station presets make sure your vehicle is in PARK P then press the or 2 button of the memory control You will hear a single chime ring to let you know the memory position will be recalled If you use the unlock button on the keyless entry transmitter to enter the vehicle the preset driver s seat mirror positions and radio station presets will be recalled if programmed in the Driver Information Center DIC The numbers on the back of the transmitters 1 or 2 correspond to the numbers on the memory control The preset driver s seat mirror positions and radio station presets will also be recalled when inserting the key into the ignition if programmed in the Driver Information Center DIC See Seat Position Recall in the Index for more information To stop movement of the memory seat feature at any time press one of the memory buttons or power seat controls Easy Exit Seat This feature makes entering or leaving the driver s seat easier v
139. dlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds This can be turned off by pressing the horn button again or by waiting for 30 seconds or by starting the vehicle Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your dealer Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle any remaining transmitters must also be matched Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it 2 13 Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won t work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it s probably time to change the battery NOTICE When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter 2 14 To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter do the following 1 Insert a thin coin or similar object in the slot between the covers of the transm
140. driving Filling Your Tank Fuel vapor is highly flammable It burns violently and that can cause very bad injuries Don t smoke if you re near fuel or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel The fuel cap is located on the driver s side of the vehicle While refueling let the fuel cap hang by the tether To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly to the left counterclockwise If you get fuel on yourself and then something ignites it you could be badly burned Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle in the Index When you put the fuel cap back on turn it to the right clockwise until you hear a clicking sound Make sure you fully install the cap The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index NOTICE If you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfun
141. ds are a few reasons why you ll need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow If you ll be pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 4 000 Ibs 1 814 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you re driving Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch If you don t seal them deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle See Carbon Monoxide in the Index Dirt and water can too 4 63 Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground 4 64 Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 2 000 Ibs 907 kg loaded then it needs its own brakes and they must be adequate Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly
142. e Exit This button is used to program and recall the desired driver s seat exit entry position The seat position can be personalized for driver and driver 2 To store the seat exit position for driver 1 or driver 2 do the following 1 Select the desired driver number by pressing the 1 or 2 button The seat will move to the last stored memory position 2 Adjust the seat to the desired exit entry position 3 Press and hold the the exit button for three seconds A double chime will sound to let you know the exit position has been stored for the identified driver driver 1 or 2 To use the exit entry feature do one of the following Press the exit button on the memory control Or if you have this feature enabled active in the DIC then removing the key from the ignition will cause the seat to move to the exit entry position See Driver Information Center in the Index Heated Front Seats If Equipped The buttons for the driver s side heated seat are located on the driver s side door panel The buttons for the passenger s side heated seat are located on the passenger s side door panel The engine must be running for this feature to operate To heat the entire seat press the horizontal button with the heated seat symbol Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the seat off The indicator lights will glow to indicate the level of heat sel
143. e See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating in the Index A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C Protect against rust and corrosion Help keep the proper engine temperature Let the warning lights and gages work as they should NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty 6 25 What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which won t damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you do
144. e amount of outside air entering your vehicle The light on the recirculation button will glow This is helpful when you are trying to limit odors entering your vehicle and for maximum air conditioning performance in hot weather Press this button again to allow outside air to enter the vehicle The light on the recirculation button will go off Pressing this button cancels the auto recirculation feature To resume the auto recirculation function press the AUTO button Each time the vehicle is started the system will revert to the auto recirculation function If you select recirculation while in defrost defog or floor the light on the button will flash and go out to let you know this is not allowed This is to prevent fogging When the weather is cool or damp operating the system in recirculation for extended periods of time may cause fogging of the vehicle s windows To clear the fog select either defog or front defrost Be sure A C off is not selected You will want to allow the air conditioning to run automatically to help dehumidify the air Re Air Conditioning Press this button to turn the air conditioning compressor on and off Air Conditioning Off When you turn the air conditioning off this symbol will appear on the display When air conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode the system will run the air conditioning automatically to cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle If you select A C off while in fro
145. e number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting HUMMER please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you should file with the GM BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAM VAP The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and
146. e oil s remaining useful life It will show 100 when the system is reset after an oil change It will alert you to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions Always reset the engine oil life after an oil change To reset the Oil Life System press and hold the select button for five seconds while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed OIL LIFE RESET will appear on the display for 10 seconds to let you know the system is reset The DIC does not replace the need to maintain your vehicle as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual Also the oil change reminder will not detect dusty conditions or engine malfunctions that may affect the oil Also the oil change reminder does not measure how much oil you have in your engine So be sure to check your oil level often See Engine Oil in the Index Personalization Button You can program certain features to a preferred setting for up to two people Press the personalization button to scroll through the following personalization features All of the personalization options may not be available on your vehicle Only the options available will be displayed on your DIC ALARM WARNING TYPE AUTOMATIC LOCKING AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING SEAT POSITION RECALL PERIMETER LIGHTING REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT CURB VIEW EASY EXIT SEAT DISPLAY UNITS E M DISPLAY LANGUAGE The default options for the above features were
147. e previous station and stay there The radio will seek only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal 3 11 lt qSCAN p Press and hold one of the arrows for more than two seconds The radio will produce one beep The radio will scan to a station play for a few seconds then go on to the next station SCAN will be displayed Press one of the arrows again to stop scanning The radio will scan only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal To scan your preset stations press and hold one of the arrows for more than four seconds The radio will produce two beeps The radio will scan to the first preset play for a few seconds then go on to the next station SCAN will be displayed Press one of the arrows again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning The radio will scan only to presets that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press BAND to select AM FM1 or FM2 3 12 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization that best suits the type of station you are listening to 5 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons The radio will produce one beep Whenever you
148. e speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t make full throttle starts Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings aren t yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Don t tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer in the Index for more information 2 19 Ignition Positions With your key in the ignition switch you can turn it to four different positions NOTICE If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can t turn it be sure you are using the correct key if so is it all the way in Turn the key only with your hand Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch If none of this works then your vehicle needs service B ACCESSORY This position lets you use things like the radio power windows and the windshield wipers when the engine is off C RUN This position is for driving D START This position starts your engine Retained Accessory Power RAP The Retained Accessory Power RAP feature will allow certain features on your vehicle to continue to work up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to LOCK A LOCK This position locks your ignition and transmission It s a theft deterrent feature You will only be able to remove your key when the igniti
149. e system is on and is ready to make or receive calls If the light blinks green it means that an incoming or outgoing call is in progress Press the Communication button if you notice the light blinking and you are not on a call The light will be red in the event of an OnStar system malfunction If this occurs press the OnStar button to attempt to contact an advisor If the connection is made the advisor will assist you with steps to take to make sure that the system is functioning properly If you cannot contact the advisor take your vehicle to your dealership as soon as possible for assistance Cellular Antenna The cellular antenna on the outside of your vehicle is critical to effective communication using the OnStar system OnStar Services The following services are available within OnStar service plans Your vehicle comes with a specific one year service plan that allows use of some or all of the following services Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment If an air bag deploys a priority emergency signal is sent automatically to the center An advisor will locate your vehicle s position try to contact you and assist you in the situation If the center is unable to contact you an emergency service provider will be contacted Stolen Vehicle Tracking Call the center at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 to report your vehicle stolen The system can then attempt to locate and track your vehicle and the advisor will
150. e the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically To signal a lane change just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash Hold it there until you complete your lane change The lever will return by itself when you release it An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change As you signal a turn or a lane change if the arrows flash more quickly than normal a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won t see your turn signal If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows don t go on at all when you signal a turn check for burned out bulbs and a blown fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index Turn Signal On Chime If your turn signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the DIC To turn the chime and message off move the turn signal lever to the off position Headlamp High Low Beam Changer ZD ED High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low to high beam push the lever toward the instrument panel To return to low beam headlamps pull the multifunction lever toward you Then release it When the high beams are on this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on 2 43 Flash to Pass Feature This feature l
151. e tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle And if you will tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity If you re using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch the trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You ll find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver s door or see Tire Loading in the Index Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches It s important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roa
152. e top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo area not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible Be sure the load is secured properly so driving on the off road terrain doesn t toss things around You Il find other important information in this manual See Vehicle Loading Luggage Carrier and Tires in the Index 4 17 Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns We recognize these concerns and urge every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving obey all posted regulations Avoid any driving practice that could damage the environment shrubs flowers trees grasses or disturb wildlife this includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground e Always carry a litter bag make sure all refuse is removed fr
153. e wheel wrench through the C Tire Retainer Plate hole in the spanner wrench Nut E Wheel Blocks J 5 21 Place the end of the spanner wrench on the nut and then turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen the nut holding the tire to the carrier 4 Pull off the tire retainer plate and set it aside Remove the spare tire from the wheel carrier 5 Put the spare tire near the flat tire 5 22 Use the art and text following to finish changing a flat tire The tools you ll be using include the jack A the wheel blocks B the wheel wrench C jack handle extension D the jack handle E and the ratchet F Before proceeding be sure to set the wheel blocks B on the appropriate tire as shown previously Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1 To remove the center cap place the flat end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry the center cap out 2 Slide the ratchet onto the wheel wrench with the DOWN mark facing you 3 Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts Don t remove them yet You will now need to jack the vehicle up using the instructions following 5 23 4 Assemble the jack and tools as follows Front Flat Tire Position the jack under the vehicle on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame sections overlap See the graphic following for an approximate measurement of the jack location on the frame
154. ealer heel ing AE Front and Rear Sidemarker Lamps It is recommended that these components be replaced by your dealer Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the lamp housing 6 36 Taillamps 3 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it A Stoplamp from the taillamp housing 4 Pull the bulb straight out B Turn Signal Lamp eae ET C Back Up Lamp 2 Remove the two screws 5 Press a new bulb into the socket insert it into from the rear lamp the taillamp housing and turn the socket clockwise assembly and remove until it is locked in place a 6 Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tighten the screws 6 37 Corner Roof Marker Lamps 1 Remove the screw and lift off the lens 6 38 Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it and remove the old bulb 3 Put anew bulb into the socket Reinstall the socket into the lens and turn it clockwise to lock it into place Hook the side of the lens with the hook end in the notch first and then tighten the screw Center Roof Marker Lamps 1 Push in on the notch with a flat tool and pull the lamp out 2 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the lamp housing 3 Remove the bulb from the bulb socket 4 Put the new bulb into the bulb socket 5 Place the hook end of the lamp in place on one side and push the other end of the lamp down until it locks in place 6 39 Windshield Wi
155. ected three for high two for medium and one for low The low setting warms the seatback and seat cushion until the seat temperature is near body temperature The medium and high heat the seatback and seat cushion to a slightly higher temperature You will be able to feel heat in about two minutes To heat only the seatback press the vertical button with the heated seatback symbol An indicator light on the button will glow to designate that only the seatback is being heated Additional presses will cycle through the heat levels for the seatback only Press the horizontal button again to heat the entire seat The heated front seats will shut off when the ignition is turned to LOCK Your vehicle also has rear heated seats See the section Rear Heated Seats later in this section 1 6 Reclining Front Seatbacks The vertical power seat control described earlier allows the seatback to recline But don t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts can t do their job when you re reclined like this The shoulder belt can t do its job In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt can t do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injurie
156. ed The radio will play while the tape advances The station frequency and FWD will appear on the display You may select stations during forward operation by using TUNE and SEEK 5 SIDE Press this pushbutton to play the other side of the tape 3 17 lt qSEEK P The right arrow is the same as the NEXT pushbutton and the left arrow is the same as the PREV pushbutton If the arrow is held or pressed more than once the player will continue moving forward or backward through the tape SEEK and a positive or negative number will appear on the display lt qSCAN p gt Press and hold one of the arrows for more than two seconds SCAN will be displayed and the radio will produce one beep Use this feature to listen to each selection on the current side of the tape for 10 seconds Press either arrow again to stop scanning Your tape must have at least 3 seconds of silence between each selection for scan to work BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a tape is playing The tape will stop but remain in the player TAPE CD Press this button to play a tape when listening to the radio Press this button to switch between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening amp Eject Press this button to to eject a tape Eject may be activated with the radio off Cassette tapes may be loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first 3
157. ee Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 3 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part 1 43 Cae on ge Ny 6 4 N Ke Hie YS G i h Cy y pp Ads p x ib aa a The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And yov d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or a crash The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor 1 44 You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
158. ehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Fuel The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies your engine You will find the VIN at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number in the Index Gasoline Octane Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher If the octane is less than 87 you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible Otherwise you might damage your engine A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered normal This does not indicate a problem exists or that a higher octane fuel is necessary If you are using 87 octane or higher octane fuel and you hear heavy knocking your engine needs service Gasoline Specifications It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications which were developed by the American Automobile Manufac
159. elp reduce the chance of injury the child also has to be secured within the restraint The vehicle s belt Then follow the instructions for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both These restraints use the belt system in system secures the add on child restraint in the your vehicle but the child also has to be secured within vehicle and the add on child restraint s harness the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury system holds the child in place within the restraint When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer One system the three point harness has straps that come down over each of the infant s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch The five point harness system has two shoulder straps two hip straps and a crotch strap A shield may take the place of hip straps 1 55 Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat General Motors therefore recommends that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a forward facing child seat
160. en while the ignition is in RUN this message will appear on the DIC and you will hear a chime Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display FUEL LEVEL LOW If the fuel level is low this message will appear on the DIC and you will hear a chime Refuel as soon as possible Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message immediately and clear it from the DIC display It will also clear itself after 10 seconds The low fuel light near the fuel gage will still remain on in either case 2 108 CHECK ENG OIL LEVEL If the oil level in the vehicle is low this message will appear on the DIC Check the oil level and correct it as necessary You may need to let the vehicle cool or warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message will clear Once the problem is corrected pressing the select button will clear this message from the DIC display CHECK WASHER FLUID If the washer fluid level is low this message will appear on the DIC Adding washer fluid will clear the message Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display TRACTION ACTIVE When the traction control system has detected that any of the vehicle s wheels are slipping the traction control system will activate and this message will appear on the DIC For more i
161. en you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid See Periodic Maintenance Inspections in the Index Checking Brake Fluid Semel You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap Just look at the brake fluid reservoir The fluid level should be above MIN If it isn t have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak ee After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark What to Add When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake fluid Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid
162. enance 7 500 Miles 12 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 22 500 Miles 37 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 9 Scheduled Maintenance 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation
163. enger s air bag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group 1 38 United States A CAUTION If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when you have turned off the air bag it means that something may be wrong with the air bag system The right front passenger s air bag could inflate even though the switch is off If this ever happens don t let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right front passenger s position for example don t secure a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s seat until you have your vehicle serviced Canada To turn off the right front passenger s air bag insert your ignition key into the switch push in and move the switch to the off position The AIR BAG OFF light will come on to let you know that the right front passenger s air bag is off The right front passenger s air bag will remain off until you turn it back on again and the AIR BAG OFF light will stay on to remind you that the air bag is off 1 39 1 40 Pes oon al United States Canada To turn the right front passenger s air bag on again insert your ignition key into the switch push in and move the switch to the on position Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your
164. engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Don t drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off NOTICE If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into your engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you re driving Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change both the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions Inheavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 100 000 miles 166 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick NOTICE Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean
165. eously press and hold both the desired button on HomeLink and the hand held transmitter button Do not release the buttons until Step 4 has been completed Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedures noted in Gate Operator and Canadian Programming found later in this section 4 The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons begin with Step two under Programming HomeLink Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the programmed channels If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Steps 6 8 following to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 6 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the Learn or Smart button This can be usually found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit Firmly press and release the Learn or Smart button The name and color of the button may
166. epared to provide your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Allow five working days for fulfillment Trip Interruption Assistance HUMMER will reimburse any reasonable trip interruption expenses up to 500 00 when directly associated with warranty disablement Trip Interruption service covers expenses such as meals and overnight lodging if vehicle disablement occurs at least 150 miles 240 km from your home or rental property You will be required to obtain prior approval from HUMMER Roadside Assistance and pay for expenses at the time of disablement Original receipts should be submitted to HUMMER Roadside Assistance for reimbursement A service representative will provide assistance when you call The Roadside Assistance services listed are available to retail and retail lease customers operating 2002 HUMMER s for a period of 3 years 36 000 miles 60 000 km All services must be pre arranged by HUMMER Roadside Assistance Over the phone assistance such as providing the name of the closest dealer or minor technical advice etc is available to all owner operators of HUMMER s regardless of vehicle or mileage Just dial HUMMER Roadside Assistance at 1 866 HUMMER6 1 866 486 6376 Roadside Assistance prompt to reach a qualified representative who can assist you Text telephone TTY users call 1 888 889 2438 Your Roadside Assistance representative will ask for the following information when your call is received Veh
167. er the worst tire traction On these surfaces it s very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if you do get moving poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only Driving in Water Heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it If it s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe don t try it you probably won t get through Also water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts If the water isn t too deep drive slowly through it At faster speeds water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get your tailpipe under water And as long as your tailpipe is under water you Il never be able to start your engine When you go through water remember that when your brakes get wet it may take you longer to stop Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it s only shallow water it can sti
168. ergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it s pavement or gravel the condition of the road wet dry icy tire tread the condition of your brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your engine ever stops while you re driving brake normally but don t pump your brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If your engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Anti Lock Brake System ABS Your vehicle has anti lock brakes ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start your engine and begin to drive away your anti lock brake system will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or cl
169. erheat protection mode should be avoided NOTICE After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss change the oil and reset the oil life system See Engine Oil in the Index If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine 5 10 Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode in the Index for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency NOTICE If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode in the Index for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine An overheat warning along with a low coolant message c
170. ervice subscription agreement is required and an additional fee may be required Services are available 24 hours a day 7 days a week For more information call 1 888 ONSTAR 7 1 888 667 8277 2 66 OnStar Services Button Press this button once to contact an advisor who will be able to assist you with these services If you are not quickly connected the system will automatically reset and redial This ensures connection to the center there is no additional action required Press the Communication button to cancel the automatic redial Emergency Button In an emergency situation press the emergency service button Upon receiving the call an advisor at the center will locate your vehicle and assess the situation If necessary the advisor will alert the nearest emergency service provider Communication Button Press this button at the end of acall Also press this button to answer a call from the center or cancel a call if one of the other buttons is accidentally pressed This button is also used to access OnStar Personal Calling and Virtual Advisor services See the OnStar owner package for more information Volume Control You can control the volume of the OnStar System using either the volume control knob on the radio or if equipped the steering wheel volume controls Telltale Light This light will indicate the status of the system A solid green light will come on when you start the vehicle to let you know that th
171. et the engine compartment cool down wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag Replace the cap and completely tighten it Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be at the FULL COLD mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for reservoir location Adding Washer Fluid Your vehicle has a CHECK WASHER FLUID message that comes on in the DIC when the washer fluid is low Add washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir when this message comes on See Check Washer Fluid Message in the Index for more information The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full NOT
172. et them hang over the rear or sides of your vehicle Don t load cargo directly on the roof of your vehicle Load cargo only on top of the crossrails and tie the cargo down to the crossrail support cargo tie down loops 1 Loosen the lock knobs on the crossrail support by f z turning the knobs counterclockwise Only loosen Don t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading them enough to allow the crossrails to slide easily your vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading Your Vehicle in the Index 2 60 2 Slide the crossrails to the desired position being sure to align the lines in the side rails with the arrows on the crossrail supports 3 Tighten the lock knobs and then try to move the crossrails back and forth to be sure that they do not move 4 Once you load the cargo onto the crossrails secure it by tying it down to the crossrail support cargo tie down loops Do not load cargo directly on the roof or your vehicle Be sure you do not cover the roof marker lamps or the Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL located above the rear glass with cargo To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you re driving check often to make sure that the cargo is still securely fastened and that the crossrails are tight Stop Tabs If your vehicle has a sunroof it will have crossrail stop tabs placed in the siderails These tabs prevent you from moving the crossrails past t
173. eterrent system Passlock is a passive theft deterrent system Passlock enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a valid key If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with the fuel system is disabled and the vehicle will not start During normal operation the security light will turn off approximately five seconds after the key is turned to RUN If the engine stalls and the security light flashes wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before trying to restart the engine Remember to release the key from START as soon as the engine starts If the engine does not start after three tries the vehicle needs service If the engine is running and the security light comes on you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine off However your Passlock system is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time You may also want to check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index See your dealer for service In an emergency call the GM Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance in the Index New Vehicle Break In NOTICE Your vehicle doesn t need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t drive at any on
174. ets you use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic position To use it pull the turn signal lever toward you then release it If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam your high beam headlamps will turn on They ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you The high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on Release the lever to return to normal operation Windshield Wipers You control the windshield wipers by turning the band with the wiper symbol on it Mist For a single wiping cycle turn the band to mist Hold it there until the wipers start Then let go The wipers will stop after one wipe If you want more wipes hold the band on mist longer 2 44 WY Delay You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes This can be very useful in light rain or snow Turn the band to choose the delay time The closer to the top of the lever the shorter the delay GD Low Speed For steady wiping at low speed turn the band away from you to the first solid band past the delay settings For high speed wiping turn the band further to the second solid band past the delay settings To stop the wipers move the band to off High Speed For high speed wiping turn the band further to the second solid band past the delay settings Off To stop the wipers
175. f adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see the part of this manual called Children Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We ll start with the driver position Driver Position This part describes the driver s restraint system Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here s how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 1 22 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly When the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the way it will lock To permit the shoulder belt to move freely again unbuckle the belt let it retract all the way and buckle up again 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able t
176. f the heating and air conditioning Push the knob up down system Check with your dealer before adding left or right to direct the equipment to the outside of the vehicle airflow Increase or decrease the amount of air flow by turning the knob located in the center of the vents The rear seat outlets work the same as the front outlets Audio Systems Your audio system has been designed to operate easily and to give years of listening pleasure You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first Find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all of its controls to be sure you re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP you can play your audio system even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power in the Index 3 10 Setting the Time Your radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to represent hours and an M or MN to represent minutes Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour appears on the display AM or PM will also appear Press and hold the minute button until the correct minute appears on the display The time may be set with the ignition on or off To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting Radio Data System RDS information press and hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time for two seconds until RDS TIM
177. f use Your radio may display CLEAN to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer If this message appears on the display your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player If you notice a reduction in sound quality try a known good cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality clean the tape player For best results use a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealer GM Part No 12344789 The broken tape detection feature of your cassette tape player may identify the cleaning cassette as a damaged tape in error To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected use the following steps 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five seconds READY will appear on the display and the cassette symbol will flash for five seconds 4 Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette 5 Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer s recommended cleaning time After the cleaning cassette is ejected the broken tape detection feature will be active again You may also choose a n
178. face against the back of the infant The harness system holds the infant in place and in a crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint 1 53 A forward facing child seat C E provides restraint for the child s body with the harness and also sometimes with surfaces such as T shaped or shelf like shields 1 54 A booster seat F G is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner and some high back booster seats have a five point harness A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window Q How do child restraints work A T shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child s body A shelf or armrest type shield has straps that are attached to a wide shelf like shield that swings up or to the side A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain seat or position children A built in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle An add on child restraint system is a portable one which is When choosing a child restraint be sure the child purchased by the vehicle s owner restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor For many years add on child restraints have used vehicle safety standards the adult belt system in the vehicle To h
179. ff the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuver Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision So here are some tips for passing Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it s all right to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
180. ffective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you can t there isn t room That s the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes See Braking in Emergencies earlier in this section It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available 4 12 An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you re driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease o
181. ffects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 16 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it s against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if someone plans to drive It s a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things The amount of alcohol consumed The drinker s body weight The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Association a 180 1b 82 kg person w
182. first unlock the clip so you can pull out the pin To unlock the clip squeeze the clip and turn it so it is in line with the rest of the pin Remove the pin and slide the winch platform out from the receiver NOTICE Do not use the winch platform to winch at a tension of more than 9 000 Ibs 4 082 kg This would damage your vehicle s frame This damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty 4 73 If you are using a winch to pull out another vehicle follow the winch manufactures guidelines and observe NOTICE the following to prevent damage to your vehicle If possible have your vehicle anchored from Using a power winch with the transmission in the opposite side of the winch to a solid gear to pull out another vehicle may damage the immovable object transmission When operating a power winch If winching from the front use both of the rear always leave the transmission in NEUTRAL N recovery loops If winching from the rear use both of the front recovery loops If you are using a winch to pull out your own vehicle Put your transmission in NEUTRAL N follow the winch manufactures guidelines for self recovery and observe the following to prevent damage to your vehicle Use your regular brakes to hold your vehicle in place and block the wheels to keep the vehicle from moving Do not self recover your vehicle by wrapping the winch cable around an object such as a pulley block or tree and attac
183. following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle Reducing vehicle speed Avoiding hard accelerations Avoiding steep uphill grades If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following 2 90 If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so Stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling Your Tank in the Index The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out
184. fore you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Trailer Wiring Harness Heavy Duty Trailer Wiring Package Your vehicle is equipped with the eight wire trailer towing harness This harness with a seven pin universal heavy duty trailer connector is attached to the rear bumper 4 69 The eight wire harness contains the following trailer circuits Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal Brown Taillamps White Ground Light Green Back up Lamps Light Blue Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL Red Battery Feed Dark Blue Trailer Brake 4 70 Front Receiver gt Roa or C yy lt 7 tA a t 4 s t 4 4 a 4 A z i LUUN ee ix KERRI Your vehicle is equipped with a front receiver You can use the receiver with a power winch platform described later in this section receiver extension or use it with other accessories Never use the front receiver to tow a trailer Receiver Extension If Equipped Use the receiver extension with the front receiver and various light duty accessories such as bike racks The receiver extension was not intended for heavy duty use such as trailer towing winching or vehicle recovery To use the front receiver with the receiver extension do the following A Receiver Extension B Wing Nuts Locate the receiver extension in the rear of the vehicle where it is attached
185. formation on automatic door locks see Programmable Automatic Door Locks in the Index alge eo cee Se Seat Position Recall Press the personalization button until SEAT POSITION RECALL appears in the display To select your personalization for seat position recall press the select button while SEAT POSITION RECALL is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices SEAT POSITION RECALL OFF default The memory seat position you saved will only be recalled when the memory button 1 or 2 is pressed SEAT POSITION RECALL AT KEY IN The memory seat position you saved will be recalled when you put the key in the ignition SEAT POSITION RECALL ON REMOTE The memory seat position you saved will be recalled when you unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter Choose one of the three options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on seat position recall see Memory Seat and Mirrors in the Index Perimeter Lighting Press the personalization button until PERIMETER LIGHTING appears in the display To select your personalization for perimeter lighting press the select button while PERIMETER LIGHTING is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices PERIMETER LIGHTING ON default The headlamps and back up
186. forming maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt have a qualified technician do the work If you want to get the service information see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Part B Owner Checks and Services tells you what should be checked and when It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections explains important inspections that your dealer s service department or another qualified service center should perform Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants lists some recommended products necessary to help keep your vehicle properly maintained These products or their equivalents should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done Part E Maintenance Record is a place for you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on your vehicle Keep your maintenance receipts They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we don t know exactly how you ll drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times
187. g there Don t turn off the passenger s air bag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group See Air Bag Off Switch in the Index for more on this including important safety information If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when you have turned off the air bag it means that something may be wrong with the air bag system The right front passenger s air bag could inflate even though the switch is off If this ever happens don t let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right front passenger s position for example don t secure a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s seat until you have your vehicle serviced Charging System Indicator Light The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition but the engine is not running as a check to show you it is working It should go out once the engine is running If it stays on or comes on while you are driving you may have a problem with the charging system It could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt or another electrical problem Have it checked right away Driving while this light is on could drain your battery When this light comes on the DIC will also display the battery not charging message See DIC later in this section If you must drive a short distance with the light on be certain to
188. ghts and Gages in the Index These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle CAUTION POSSIBLE INJURY PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING CAUSTIC BATTERY ACID COULD CAUSE BURNS AVOID SPARKS OR FLAMES SPARK OR FLAME COULD EXPLODE BATTERY LATCH BOTH LAP AND SHOULDER BELTS TO PROTECT OCCUPANT 4 DO NOT TWIST SAFETY Q BELT WHEN ATTACHING FASTEN G SEAT AIR BAG T aN BELTS MOVE SEAT z DO NOT INSTALL FULLY O A REAR FACING K REARWARD CHILD RESTRAINT SECURE 25 IN THIS SEATING CHILD SEAT POSITION PULL BELT OUT COMPLETELY a THEN SECURE y CHILD SEAT e DO NOT INSTALL A FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN THIS SEATING POSITION POWER DOOR LOCK winpow Ww UNLOCK MASTER PARKING LAMPS HAZARD WARNING FLASHER DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS Ss 1 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM ENGINE OIL ae Ee ANTI LOCK 6 BRAKES FUSE BOX ACCESS ENGINE COOLANT OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE SERVICE MANUAL E n Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Here you ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts 1 2 Seats and Seat Controls 1 45 1 16 Safety Belts They re for Everyone 1 21 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About 1 48 Safety Belts and the Answers 1 49 1 22 How to Wear Safety Bel
189. h shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision At a BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up Ill be careful isn t the right answer What if there s an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There s something else about drinking and driving that many people don t know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptio
190. hanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier NOTICE Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Don t use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage wouldn t be covered under your warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for service Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn t be covered by your warranty To check on fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you ll be
191. he drive gear you want Pe AO DS 5 Have the system fixed as soon as you can 2 35 Parking Over Things That Burn Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite Don t park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn 2 36 Engine Exhaust Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you can t see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if Your exhaust system sounds strange or different Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs weren t done correctly Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and Have your vehicle fixed immediately Running Your Engine While You re Parked It s better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle See the earlier Caution under Engine Exhaust Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the fan is at the highest setting One place this can happen
192. he opening of the sunroof and loading cargo too far forward Cargo loaded too far forward could fall onto the sunroof and into the passenger compartment Loading cargo too far forward could also cause the OnStar and navigation system if equipped to function improperly or not at all Vehicles with the off road lamps will have additional stop tabs placed in the siderails to prevent you from moving the lamps too far rearward causing them to shine into the optional sunroof opening 2 61 2 Pull the end cap straight Crossrail Channels out from the crossrail The crossrails have built in channels to allow you to attach other items designed for this system such as basket luggage carriers bike racks ski racks etc To use the crossrail channels do the following 3 Peel back the rub strip from the crossrail 4 Slide the accessory you are using into the crossrail channel and secure it as the accessory instructions direct 5 Place the crossrail end cap back on and lock it with the key You will not be using the rub strip when you use crossrail accessories When you remove any crossrail accessory be sure to reinstall the rub strip To do this press the rub strip in place until it seats back into the channel of the crossrail 1 Use the included key to unlock the crossrail end cap by turning it counterclockwise If you ever loose a key your dealer will be able to help you obtain a replacement 2 62 Ashtray and
193. he seat to increase or decrease lumbar support in an area of the lower seatback To increase support press and hold the front of the control To decrease support press and hold the rear of the control Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support You can also reshape the side wing area of the lower seatback for more lateral support To increase support press and hold the top of the control To decrease support press and hold the bottom of the control Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support Memory Seat The controls for the memory function are located on the driver s F door trim panel These buttons are used to program and recall the memory settings for the driver s seat and both the driver s and the passenger s outside mirrors and the radio station presets The seat mirror positions and radio station presets can be personalized for both driver 1 and driver 2 Driver 1 or driver 2 corresponds to the memory buttons labeled 1 and 2 on the driver s door and the numbers 1 or 2 embossed on the back of each keyless entry transmitter To set your memory seat mirrors and radio station presets do the following 1 Adjust the driver s seat including the recliner lumbar and side wing area both outside mirrors and the radio station presets to your preference See Mirrors and Radio in the Index to learn how to a
194. he transmission fluid while it is hot A cold check is used only as a reference If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check It doesn t take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Don t overfill NOTICE We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON IIL because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transmission Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 6 21 Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Lubricant 6 22 To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface The proper level is from 5 8 inch to 1 5 8 inch 15 mm to 40 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index All Wheel Drive Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these vehicles However there are
195. he upper selector switch to the left or right to choose the mirror you want to adjust then press the dots located on the four way control pad to adjust the mirror To fold or unfold the mirrors put the upper selector switch in the center position and then press and hold the side left or right dots on the lower control until the mirror begins to fold or unfold The mirrors also include a memory function which works in conjunction with the memory seats See Memory Seats in the Index for more information 2 56 Convex Outside Mirror Your passenger s side mirror is convex A convex mirror s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver s seat A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors When you operate the rear window defogger a defogger also warms the heated driver s and passenger s outside rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice snow and condensation See Rear Window Defogger in the Index for more information Electrochromic Rearview Outside Mirror with Curb View Assist The driver s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of the headlamps behind you See Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature earlier in thi
196. heck the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that can t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage 6 44 Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need look at the Certification Tire label The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec number on each tire s sidewall When you get new tires get ones with that same TPC Spec number That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance handling speed rating traction ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle If your tires have an all season tread design the TPC number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type bias bias belted or radial as your original tires Mixing tires could cause you to l
197. heel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement 6 47 NOTICE The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index for more information Used Replacement Wheels Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You can t know how it s been used or how far it s been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel 6 48 Tire Chains NOTICE Use tire chains only where legal and only when you must Use only SAE Class S type chains that are the proper s
198. her notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for HUMMER whenever it appears in this manual Please keep this manual in your vehicle so it will be there if you ever need it when you re on the road If you sell the vehicle please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it Litho in U S A Part Number S2327 A First Edition ii a N We support voluntary technician certification CERTIFIED WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH National Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE N 7 Canadian Owners Canadian Owners You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your dealer or from Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Copyright General Motors Corporation 03 29 02 All Rights Reserved How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If you do this it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle In this manual you ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly Safety Warnings and Symbols You will find a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people In the caution area we tell
199. hicle for a long trip you 11 want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip in the Index 4 54 Dinghy Towing Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle 1 Firmly set the parking brake 2 Shift the transmission to PARK P 3 Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle 4 Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL N See All Wheel Drive in the Index for the proper procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for your vehicle 5 Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle 6 Turn the ignition to Lock See Ignition Positions in the Index for more information Shifting an all wheel drive vehicle s transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P You or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL Dolly Towing Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle 1 Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the dolly manufacturer s instructions Firmly set the parking brake Shift the transmission to PARK P Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL N See All Wheel Drive in the Index for the proper procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for your vehicle
200. hing it back to your vehicle s recovery loops e Always attach the winch cable directly to a solid anchor directly in front of your vehicle to achieve a straight line pull 4 74 Section 5 Problems on the Road Here you ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road 5 2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5 12 Cooling System 5 2 Other Warning Devices 5 18 Engine Fan Noise 5 3 Jump Starting 5 18 If a Tire Goes Flat 5 9 Towing Your Vehicle 5 19 Changing a Flat Tire 5 9 Engine Overheating 5 30 If Yov re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off The hazard warning flasher button is located at the top of the steering column Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in and even if the key isn t in Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off Press the button again to turn the flashers off When the hazard warning flashers are on your turn signals won t work Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can use them to warn others Set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Jump Starting If your battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to
201. ho drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of a liquor like whiskey gin or vodka It s the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men 4 4 Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks The law in an increasing number of U S states and throughout Canada sets the legal limit at 0 08 percent In some other countries the limit is even lower For example it is 0 05 percent in both France and Germany The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we ve seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Researc
202. hotter transmission operating temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on a frequent basis see Scheduled Maintenance in the Index for the proper transmission maintenance intervals 2 88 TRAC OFF Light The TRAC OFF light will come on when a Traction Control System Anti Lock Brake System or engine related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service Adjust your driving accordingly See Traction Control System TCS in the Index If the TCS detects that the vehicle s brakes are overheating the TCS will shut off and the TRAC OFF light will come on When the brakes cool off the TCS will turn back on automatically and the TRAC OFF light will go out Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing a
203. ic information from these stations and will only work when the information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station While you are tuned to an RDS station the station name or the call letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency RDS stations may also provide the time of day a program type PTY for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast 3 14 DISP Display Press this knob to change what appears on the display while using RDS The display options are station name RDS station frequency PTY and the name of the program if available Pressing and holding this knob will activate the RDS default display Finding RDS Stations P TYPE LIST Program Type Turn this knob to select the program type PTY you want to listen to TYPE and a PTY will appear on the display SEEK TYPE Press this button to seek to the first RDS broadcaster of the selected program type If the radio cannot find the desired program type NONE will appear on the display and the radio will return to the last station you were listening to lt q SEEK P Press one of the arrows to find radio stations for the PTY that you want to listen to The last PTY selected will be used for seek or scan If a station with the selected PTY is not found NONE will appear on the display BAND Alterna
204. icated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the ignition Low Fuel Light The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when you are starting the engine This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel To turn it off add fuel to the fuel tank See Fuel in the Index Driver Information Center DIC The DIC display is located on the instrument panel cluster above the steering column The DIC can display information such as the trip odometer fuel economy and personalization features A Trip Information This button will display the odometer personal trip odometer business trip odometer hourmeter annual log and the timer B Fuel Information This button will display the current range average fuel economy instant fuel economy and engine oil life C Personalization This button will change personal options available on your vehicle D Select This button resets certain functions and turns off or acknowledges messages on the DIC DIC Operation and Displays The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the current driver and the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off If a problem is detected a warning message will appear on the display Pressing any of the four buttons will acknowledge clear
205. ick out dimly lighted objects Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness the inability to see in dim light and aren t even aware of it 4 39 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4 40 Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble On a wet road you can t stop accelerate or turn as well because your tire to road traction isn t as good as on dry roads And if your tires don t have much tread left you ll get even less traction It s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you can t tr
206. icking noise while this test is going on This is normal If there s a problem with the anti lock brake system this warning light will stay on See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in the Index Let s say the road is wet and you re driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here s what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels 4 8 The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember Anti lock doesn t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you won t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have anti lock brakes Using Anti Lock Don t pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may feel the brakes vibrate or you may notice some no
207. icle Identification Number VIN Name and home address Telephone number and location from which you are calling Location license plate number and color of your HUMMER Mileage of vehicle and description of problem Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day 7 days a week 365 days a year including weekends and holidays Should you have any questions about roadside assistance call the HUMMER Roadside Assistance Center or contact your dealer Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty HUMMER reserves the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States Please refer to the Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book or call 1 800 268 6800 for emergency services Courtesy Transportation HUMMER has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for new vehicles The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Several transportation option
208. ide of the button located on the overhead console until the sunroof reaches the desired vent position or until it stops moving To close the sunroof from the vent position press and hold the rear side of the button until the sunroof reaches the desired position or until it is fully closed HomeLink Transmitter HomeLink a combined universal transmitter and receiver provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand held transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators garage door openers entry door locks security systems and home lighting Additional HomeLink information can be found on the internet at www homelink com or by calling 1 800 355 3515 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 2 71 Programming HomeLink Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage
209. ifted out of NEUTRAL the indicator light will go out You may start the engine and shift the transmission to the desired position 2 31 Parking Brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will flash A chime will activate when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moved at least 3 mph 5 km h for at least three seconds 2 32 To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down Pull the bottom edge of the lever located above the parking brake pedal to release the parking brake If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released the brake system warning light will go off NOTICE Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat You may have to replace them and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill see Towing a Trailer in the Index That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving Shifting Into PARK P 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P like this It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running
210. ight outside mirror is convex the vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Don t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you re being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right Loss of Control Let s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration don t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency don t give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels aren t rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid and an accelerat
211. ight will flash as you open the door if your ignition is off This light reminds you to activate the theft deterrent system Here s how to do it 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter The security light should begin to flash 3 Close all doors The security light will stop flashing and stay on solid The security light should go off after about 30 seconds The alarm is not armed until the security light goes off If delayed locking is active the alarm will not arm until all doors are closed and the security light goes off after about thirty seconds See Delayed Locking earlier in this section If a locked door is opened without the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter the alarm will go off The headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes and the horn will sound for 30 seconds then will turn off to save the battery power Remember the theft deterrent system won t activate if you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door lock It activates only if you lock the door with a power door lock switch with the door open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off 2 17 Here s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident If you don t want to activate the theft deterrent system the vehicle sho
212. iler requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check the trailer hitch and platform and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working 4 65 Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the tr
213. ill produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display AUTO EQ Automatic Equalization Press this button to choose equalization settings The setting last chosen will appear on the display when you first press AUTO EQ Each time you press this button another setting will appear on the display and AUTO EQ will switch to one of the preset settings listed later Your audio system allows you to choose from four different equalization settings normal driver rear and spacious These settings can be used while listening to the radio the cassette tape or the CD player NORMAL This setting enhances the stereo effect DRIVER This setting gives the driver the best sound quality REAR This setting gives the rear seat passengers the best sound quality SPACIOUS This setting makes the listening space seem larger The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each preset and source 3 23 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AUDIO To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers push the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display Turn the knob to move the sound toward the left or the right speakers To adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on the display Turn the knob to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position select balance or fade and push and hold the AUDIO
214. indshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a full strength glass cleaning liquid The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water If you use a glass treatment or conditioner containing ethyl alcohol or ethyl sulfate on your glass be sure to remove the acrylic roof panel if so equipped These products may damage the panel Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Don t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing s
215. information button to scroll through the range average fuel economy instant fuel economy and the GM Oil Life System Fuel Range Press the fuel information button until RANGE appears to display the remaining distance you can drive without refueling It s based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is an average of recent driving conditions As your driving conditions change this data is gradually updated Fuel range cannot be reset Average Fuel Economy Press the fuel information button until AVG ECON appears in the display Average fuel economy is how many miles per gallon your vehicle is getting based on current and past driving conditions Press and hold the select button for two seconds while AVG ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel economy Average fuel economy will then be calculated starting from that point If the average fuel economy is not reset it will be continually updated each time you drive 2 98 Instant Fuel Economy Press the fuel information button until INST ECON appears in the display Instant fuel economy is how many miles per gallon your vehicle is at the particular moment in time The instant fuel economy cannot be reset GM Oil Life System Press the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears in the display The GM Oil Life System shows an estimate of th
216. ins follow the cleaner instructions described earlier 3 If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine treat the area with a water baking soda solution 1 teaspoon 5 ml of baking soda to 1 cup 250 ml of lukewarm water 4 Let dry Stains caused by candy ice cream mayonnaise chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain 2 First clean with cool water and allow to dry completely 3 Ifa stain remains follow the cleaner instructions described earlier Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth Rub with a clean damp cloth to remove dirt You may have to do it more than once Things like tar asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don t get them off quickly Use a clean cloth and a vinyl leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Cleaning Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth Then let the leather dry naturally Do not use heat to dry For stubborn stains use a leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Never use oils varnishes solvent based or abrasive cleaners furniture polish or shoe polish on leather Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately If dirt is allowed to work into the finish it can harm the leather Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrume
217. instrument panel lights and the radio display This will only work if the headlamps or parking lamps are on To turn on the dome lamps with the vehicle doors closed turn the thumbwheel all the way up Exit Lighting With exit lighting the interior lamps will come on when you remove the key from the ignition The lamps will not come on if the dome override button is pressed in See Dome Lamps later in this section for more information on dome override 2 51 Front Reading Lamps Your vehicle has front reading lamps located in the overhead console Press the round button located next to the lamp to turn the lamp on The lamps can be adjusted to point in the direction you want them to go Press the button again to turn the lamp off These lamps will also come on with the dome lamps 2 52 Dome Lamps The dome lamps and front reading lamps will come on when you open a door and the dome override button is in the out position You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the thumbwheel located next to the exterior lamps control all the way up In this position the dome lamps will remain on whether the doors are opened or closed TE Dome Override Press this button located below the exterior lamps control to set the dome lamps to come on automatically when the doors are opened or to remain off To turn the lamps off press the button to the in position With the button in this position the dome lamps will
218. ion skid are best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any anti lock brake system ABS helps avoid only the braking skid 4 15 Off Road Driving Also see Anti Lock Brakes in the Index Off road driving can be great fun But it does have some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself Off roading means you ve left the great North American road system behind Traffic lanes
219. ir le Guide du propri taire i pour FUEL HT 15A les fonctions des plots 1 et 2 ECMI 15A Name STUD 1 MBEC 1 BLOWER LBEC 2 STUD 2 ABS VSES ECAS IGNA IGN B LBEC 1 Usage Accessory Power Trailer Wiring Mid Bussed Electrical Center Power Feed Front Seats Right Doors Front Climate Control Fan Left Bussed Electrical Center Door Modules Door Locks Auxiliary Power Outlet Rear Cargo Area and Instrument Panel Accessory Power Trailer Wiring Brake Feed Anti Lock Brakes ECAS Electronically Controlled Air Suspension Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Left Bussed Electrical Center Left Doors Truck Body Controller Flasher Module Name TRL PRK RR PRK LR PRK PARK LP STARTER INTPARK STOP LP TBC BATT SUNROOF SEO B2 4WS RR HVAC AUX PWR Usage Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring Right Rear Parking and Sidemarker Lamps Left Rear Parking and Sidemarker Lamps Parking Lamps Relay Starter Relay Roof Marker Lamps Stoplamps Truck Body Controller Battery Feed Sunroof Off Road Lamps Vent Solenoid Canister Not Used Auxiliary Power Outlet Console 6 65 Name IGN1 PCM 1 ETC ECM INJ 1 INJ 2 IGN E RTD TRL B U PCM B F PMP 02A 6 66 Usage Ignition Relay Powertrain Control Module Electronic Throttle Control Electronic Brake Controller Ignition Coil Fuel Injectors Bank 1 Ignition Coil Fuel Injectors Bank 2 Instrument Panel Cluster Air Conditioning
220. irements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards 6 45 Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 6 46 Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
221. ise but this is normal Braking in Emergencies With anti lock you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Traction Control System TCS Your vehicle has a Traction Control System TCS that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions The system operates only if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction When this happens the system applies the brakes to limit wheel spin The Traction Control System may operate on dry roads under some conditions When this happens you may notice a reduction in acceleration This is normal and doesn t mean there s a problem with your vehicle Examples of these conditions include a hard acceleration in a turn an abrupt upshift or downshift of the transmission or driving on rough roads If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will automatically disengage When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may re engage the cruise control See Cruise Control in the Index Another feature of this system is the Traction Control 2 mode TC2 should be selected for improved traction system performance when the vehicle is on loose surfaces such as deep sand or mud To enter this mode press the TC2 button located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel TC2 onl
222. isplay track or elapsed time press the knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob for two seconds The radio will produce one beep BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The CD will stop but remain in the player TAPE DISC Press this button to play a tape when listening to the radio Press this button to switch between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening amp Eject Press this button to stop a CD when it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first Compact Disc Messages ERR Error If this message appears on the display it could be for one of the following reasons You are driving on a very rough road The CD should play when the road gets smoother A CD is upside down It is dirty scratched or wet It is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again The CD player is very hot If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected contact your dealer AM FM Radio with Six Disc Compact Disc Player with Equalization and Radio Data System RDS Bose If Equipped Playing the Radio PWR Power Push this knob t
223. istributed to the wheel that has the most traction as the vehicle starts to move Once the vehicle is moving hold the brake steady until all four wheels have cleared the obstacle After the first wheel crosses the obstacle be prepared to modulate the brake and throttle for the other wheels For mounds washouts loose up hill slopes ditches etc When wheel spin occurs as the vehicle is moving the driver may notice a slight shaking or shuddering of the vehicle This is the indication that a loss of traction is occurring on this terrain The operator should 1 Reduce throttle 2 Assess the terrain properly and adjust vehicle speed and gear ranges accordingly 4HI or 4HI Lock position for higher speed 4LO Lock for more torque and lower speeds 3 Apply slight pressure to the brake when the shaking or shuddering sensation is felt keeping the vehicle moving at a constant and controlled speed 4 Be prepared to modulate the brake and throttle through the adverse terrain 4 23 Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It s a good idea to practice in an area that s safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off road driving does require some new and different driving skills Here s what we mean Tune your senses to different kinds of signals Your eyes for example need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds With your a
224. it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to fix it Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don t wear safety belts To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy 1 29 The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it s more likely that the fetus won t be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position earlier in this section The right front passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for one thing If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again Air Bag System This part explains the air bag system You
225. ition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs 1 51 Newborn infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because a newborn infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing seat settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints 1 52 The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child for whom the safety belts are designed A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that s unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints Restraint Systems for Children An infant car bed A a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface Make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle A rear facing infant seat B provides restraint with the seating sur
226. itter housing near the key ring hole Remove the bottom by twisting the coin 2 Remove and replace the battery with a three volt CR2032 or equivalent battery positive side up 3 Align the covers and snap them together 4 Check the operation of the transmitter Liftgate It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate Make sure all other windows are shut Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed and select the control setting that will force outside air into your vehicle See Comfort Controls in the Index If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust in the Index To unlock the liftgate use the unlock button on any of the power door lock switches or the keyless entry transmitter To open the liftgate pull the handle located in the center of the door Lock the liftgate by using the lock button on any of the power door lock lock switches or the keyless entry transmitter 2 15 Theft Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that n
227. ive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Don t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels Cleaning Tires To clean your tires use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner NOTICE When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle Petroleum based products may damage the paint finish and tires Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty 6 55 Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed accele
228. ize for your tires Install them on the rear axle tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle stop and retighten them If the contact continues slow down until it stops Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle Appearance Care Remember cleaning products can be hazardous Some are toxic Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle be sure to follow the manufacturer s warnings and instructions And always open your doors or windows when you re cleaning the inside Never use these to clean your vehicle Gasoline Benzene Naphtha Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone Paint Thinner Turpentine Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous some more than others and they can all damage your vehicle too Don t use any of these unless this manual says you can In many uses these will damage your vehicle e Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach e Reducing Agents Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt Wipe vinyl leather plastic and painted surfaces with a clean damp cloth C
229. k up to return it to its upright position 4 Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place The seatback cannot be raised to the upright position unless the seat is secured to the floor A seat that isn t locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop People in the vehicle could be injured Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it 1 14 Entering or Exiting the Third Row Seat If the seatback isn t locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked To enter or exit the third row seat you must fold the second row seat down following the instructions given previously If you are exiting the third row seat with no assistance do the following 1 Reach over the second row seat and pull up on the strap loop Then pull the seat cushion up 2 Push the seat cushion forward 3 Next push the seatback forward until it is level with the floor Be sure to return the seat to the passenger position when finished Pull forward and push rearward on the seat to make sure it is locked in place 1 15 Heated Rear Seats Second Row If Equipped The controls are located on the back of the center console The ignition must be in RUN for this feature to operate To activate the heated seats press the button to cycle thro
230. l nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets See Brake System Inspection in Section 7 of this manual under Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop your disc brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you don t your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free ACDelco battery When it s time for a new battery get one that has the replacement number shown on the origin
231. label is your VIN the model designation paint information and e a list of all production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment NOTICE Don t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn t be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow etc be sure to get it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links This greatly reduces the chance of fires c
232. lamps will come on for 40 seconds if it is dark enough outside when you unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter PERIMETER LIGHTING OFF The perimeter lights will not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter Choose one of the two options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature 2 101 Remote Lock Feedback Press the personalization button until REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display To select your personalization for the feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter press the select button while REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices LOCK FEEDBACK BOTH default The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the horn will chirp the second time you press the lock button LOCK FEEDBACK OFF There will be no feedback when locking the vehicle LOCK FEEDBACK HORN The horn will chirp the second time you press the button with the lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter LOCK FEEDBACK LAMPS The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter Choose one of the four options and press the personalization butto
233. lay information in 2 105 DIC Warnings and Messages Warning messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition If there is more than one message that needs to be displayed they will appear one after another Some messages may not require immediate action but you should press the select button to acknowledge that you received the message and clear it from the display Some messages cannot be cleared from the display because they are more urgent These message required action before they can be removed from the DIC display The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them CHANGE ENGINE OIL This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to be changed See GM Oil Life System previously in this section for information on how to reset the message OIL LIFE RESET This message will appear on the display for about 10 seconds after resetting the change engine oil message LOW COOLANT LEVEL If the engine coolant level is low this message will appear on the DIC Adding coolant will clear the message 2 106 ENGINE COOLANT HOT If the cooling system temperature gets hot this message will appear in the DIC Stop the vehicle and let the engine idle in PARK P to allow the coolant to reach a safe temperature This message will clear when the coolant tempera
234. layed INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received The old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button until anew message is received or a different station is tuned to 3 26 TRAF Traffic Press this button to seek to a station that broadcasts traffic announcements TRAF will appear on the display If no station is found NO TRAF will appear on the display When a traffic announcement comes on the current station or on a related network station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing If the compact disc player is being used play will stop during the announcement Playing a Compact Disc If an error appears on the display see Compact Disc Messages later in this section LOAD CD Press the LOAD side of this button to load CDs into the compact disc player This compact disc player will hold up to six discs To insert one disc do the following 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD button 3 Wait for the light located to the right of the slot to turn green 4 Load a disc Insert the disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull the disc in When a disc is inserted the CD symbol will be displayed If you select an equalization setting for your disc it will be activated each time you play a disc If the radio is on or off the disc will begin to play automatically To in
235. leaning of Fabric Carpet Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and carpet They will clean normal spots and stains very well You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index 6 49 Here are some cleaning tips Always read the instructions on the cleaner label Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set Carefully scrape off any excess stain Use a clean cloth or sponge and change to a clean area often A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately or it will set Using Cleaner on Fabric l 2 Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt Always clean a whole trim panel or section Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines Follow the directions on the container label Apply cleaner with a clean sponge Don t saturate the material and don t rub it roughly As soon as you ve cleaned the section use a sponge to remove any excess cleaner Wipe cleaned area with a clean water dampened towel or cloth Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry 6 50 Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Stains caused by such things as catsup coffee black egg fruit fruit juice milk soft drinks vomit urine and blood can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain then sponge the soiled area with cool water Ifa stain rema
236. les 5 Now go to the driver s side of the hood and locate the prop rod 6 10 6 Pull the end of the prop rod from its holder and place it into the slot built into the hood Engine Compartment Overview When you lift the hood you ll see the following A Coolant Surge Tank E Engine Oil Dipstick I Power Steering Fluid Reservoir B Engine Air Cleaner Filter F Automatic Transmission J Remote Positive Terminal C Windshield Washer Dipstick K Brake Fluid Reservoir Fluid Reservoir G Fan L Underhood Fuse Block D Engine Oil Fill Cap H Remote Negative M Battery Terminal GND 6 11 Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on correctly To close the hood hold it up a few inches from the closed position and let it go so that it has enough force to engage the hood latch Pull up on the hood to be sure it is latched When you are sure the hood latch is engaged then you can latch both hood side latches Engine Oil If the CHECK ENG OIL LEVEL message appears on the instrument cluster it means you need to check your engine oil level right away For more information see CHECK ENG OIL LEVEL in the Index You should check your engine oil level regularly this is an added reminder 6 12 Checking Engine Oil It s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine
237. ll be lit when in this mode Off Turn the control to this position and release it to turn off all exterior lamps including the DRLs A light near the symbol will be lit when in this mode To turn the lamps back on when in this mode turn the switch to the headlamp mode The off mode will cancel when the vehicle is turned off This mode is not available for vehicle first sold in Canada 00 Parking Lamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the parking lamps together with the following Sidemarker Lamps Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights Roof Marker Lamps ZO Headlamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the headlamps together with the previously listed lamps and lights When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are in AUTO the headlamps may automatically remain on for a set time You can change this delay time using the DIC See Driver Information Center in the Index You can switch your headlamps from low to high beam by pushing the turn signal multifunction lever toward the instrument panel 2 49 Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp switch is in AUTO your automatic headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps roof marker lamps and the instrument panel lights The radio lights will also be dim To turn off the automatic he
238. ll wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Don t drive through rushing water See Driving Through Water in the Index for more information on driving through water 4 37 After Off Road Driving Driving at Night Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody chassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage Also check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue 4 38 Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively Don t drink and drive e Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you Since you can t see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead Inremote areas watch for
239. low the steps below Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a level surface Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake in the Index if necessary Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move With the engine off turn the key to the RUN position but don t start the engine Without applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P your vehicle needs service Ignition Transmission Lock Check Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn set the parking brake the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position P The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift With thie eneinemanning and frangmissipoi in eee NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from The key should come out only in LOCK the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only To check the parking brake s holding ability Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission f f PARK P Mechanism Check To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Underbody Flushing Service When you are doing this check your vehicle
240. lowly 4 42 Driving Through Flowing Water Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces If you try to drive through flowing water as you might at a low water crossing your vehicle can be carried away As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle If this happens you and the other vehicle occupants could drown Don t ignore police warning signs and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires in the Index City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You ll save time and energy See the next part Freeway Driving Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to
241. ly adjust the fan speed Press the up arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed Pressing this button when the system is off will turn the system on Wee 174 Mode Press this button to manually select the air delivery mode to the floor panel or windshield outlets The system will stay in the selected mode until the mode button is pressed again or the AUTO button is pressed Driver s Side Temperature Knob The driver s side knob is used to adjust the temperature of the air coming through the system on the driver s side The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode See Recirculation later in this section Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or increase the cabin temperature The display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing to the driver will be displayed under and to the left of the temperature setting The temperature to the rear seat area is also controlled by using this knob Passenger s Side Temperature Knob The passenger s side knob can be used to change the temperature of the air coming through the system on the passenger s side of the vehicle The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off This is possible since outside air will always fl
242. mal If the light stays on or comes on when you re driving your vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light isn t on you still have brakes but you don t have anti lock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on you don t have anti lock brakes and there s a problem with your regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light earlier in this section The anti lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 2 86 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Canada 21 0 a Ye E United States This gage shows the engine coolant temperature If the gage pointer moves into the red area it means that your engine coolant has overheated If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions you should pull off the road stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible See Engine Overheating in the Index for more information Transmission Temperature Gage Canada United States Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission temperature gage When your ignition is on the gage shows the temperature of the transmission fluid The normal operating range is from 100 F 38 C to about 265 F 130 C At approximately 265 F 130 C the DIC will display a TRANSMISSION HOT message and the transmissio
243. mission is shifted into PARK P Mode 3 All doors unlock when the key is removed from the ignition Mode 4 No automatic door unlock The automatic door locks were pre programmed at the factory to unlock all doors once the transmission is shifted to PARK P mode 1 The following instructions detail how to program your door locks differently than the factory setting Choose one of the four programming options listed above before entering the program mode To enter the program mode do the following 1 Begin with the ignition off Then pull the turn signal multifunction lever toward you and hold it there while you perform the next step 2 Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice Then with the key in LOCK release the turn signal multifunction lever Once you do this you will hear the lock switch lock and unlock the horn will chirp twice and a 30 second program timer will begin 3 You are now ready to program the automatic door locks Select one of the four programming options listed previously and press the unlock side of the power door lock switch to cycle through the unlocking options You will have 30 seconds to begin programming If you exceed the 30 second limit the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have left the program mode If this occurs repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 to re enter the programming mode You can exit the program mode any time
244. most current warnings or service messages Some warnings that can not be acknowledged cleared are ENGINE OVERHEATED OIL PRESSURE LOW REDUCED ENGINE POWER TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE These warnings must be dealt with immediately and therefore can not be cleared until the problem has been corrected The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by pressing the four buttons on the DIC These buttons are trip information fuel information personalization and select The button functions are detailed in the following 2 95 Trip Information Button Use the trip information button to scroll through the SEASON ODOMETER PERSONAL TRIP ON OFF BUSINESS TRIP ON OFF HOURMETER ANNUAL LOG and TIMER If the personal trip and or the business trip are set to ON you will also be able to scroll through more messages See Personal Trip and Business Trip next for more information Personal Trip If the PERSONAL TRIP is on turn it on or off by pressing the select button you will also be able to scroll through the following PERSONAL XX MI This shows the current distance traveled since the last reset for the personal trip odometer in either miles or kilometers PERSONAL XX X MPG This shows the amount of fuel used for the personal trip PERSONAL AVG ECONOMY This shows how many miles per gallon of fuel your vehicle is getting for the personal trip based on current and past driving conditions PERSONAL AVG MPH This
245. n t need to add anything else Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 6 26 NOTICE If you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost wouldn t be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system NOTICE If you use the proper coolant you don t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system These can be harmful Checking Coolant The coolant surge tank is located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for information on location Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly Never turn the surge tank pressure cap even a
246. n will enter a transmission protection mode When the transmission enters the protection mode you may notice a change in the transmission shifting patterns The transmission will return to normal shifting patterns when the transmission fluid temperature falls below 260 F 127 C See Driver Information Center in the Index for further information If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of approximately 275 F 135 C or greater the DIC will display a TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE warning message Pull the vehicle off the roadway when it is safe to do so Set the parking brake place the transmission in PARK P and allow the engine to idle until the transmission temperature falls below 260 F 127 C If the transmission continues to operate above 265 F 130 C please contact your nearest dealer or the GM Roadside Assistance Center NOTICE If you keep driving your vehicle with the transmission temperature gage above the normal operating range you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered under your warranty 2 87 The following situations can cause the transmission to operate at higher temperatures Towing a trailer hot outside air temperatures hauling a large or heavy load low transmission fluid level high transmission fluid level restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary transmission oil cooler A temporary solution to
247. n air bag inflate In an impact of sufficient severity the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the air bag The inflator air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger A J 33 How does an air bag restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and many side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward those air bags Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions What will you see after an air bag inflates After an air bag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated Some components of the air bag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s air bag or the instrument panel for the right front passenger s bag will be hot for a short time The parts
248. n while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature 2 102 Remote Unlock Feedback Press the personalization button until REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display To select your personalization for the feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter press the select button while REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices UNLOCK FEEDBACK LAMPS default The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter UNLOCK FEEDBACK BOTH The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock button UNLOCK FEEDBACK OFF There will be no feedback when unlocking the vehicle UNLOCK FEEDBACK HORN The horn will chirp the second time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter Choose one of the four options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature Headlamps on at Exit Press the personalization button until HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT appears in the display To select your personalization for how long the headlamps will stay on when you turn off the vehicle press the select bu
249. n your pushbuttons play for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets The radio will scan only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press BAND to select AM FM1 or FM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization that best suits the type of station selected 5 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone Bass Treble AUDIO Push the AUDIO knob until BASS or TREB appears on the display Turn the knob to increase or to decrease If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble To adjust bass or treble to the middle position select BASS or TREB and push and hold the AUDIO knob The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level to zero To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed The radio w
250. nalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and end out of the personalization options Display Language To select your personalization for display language press the select button while DISPLAY LANGUAGE is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following languages English French Spanish Choose one of the three options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it If you accidentally choose a language that you don t want or understand press and hold the personalization button and the trip information button at the same time The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages in their particular language English will be in English French will be in French and so on When you see the language that you would like release both buttons The DIC will then display the information in the language you chose You can also scroll through the different languages by pressing and holding the trip reset stem for four seconds as long as you are in the season odometer mode Select Button The select button is used to reset certain functions and turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC display The select button also toggles through the options available in each personalization menu For example this button will reset the trip odometers turn off the FUEL LEVEL LOW message and toggle through the languages you can select the DIC to disp
251. nd close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR If the passenger s side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstacles and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display RKE BATTERY LOW If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low this message will appear on the DIC The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems In this section you ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle 3 2 Comfort Controls 3 31 Rear Seat Audio 3 6 Air Conditioning 3 32 Theft Deterrent Feature RDS Radios 3 7 Heating 3 33 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 3 7 Defogging and Defrosting 3 34 Understanding Radio Reception 3 8 Rear Window Defogger 3 34 Tips About Your Audio System 3 9 Ventilation System 3 35 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 3 10 Audio Systems 3 36 Care of Your Compact Discs 3
252. need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light 4 43 Freeway Driving Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules 4 44 The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it s slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn t another vehicle in your blind spot Once
253. ness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your air bag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the air bag system may not be working properly The air bags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 2 81 Air Bag Off Light When you turn the right front passenger s air bag off this light will come on and stay on to remind you that the air bag has been turned off This light will go off when you turn the air bag back on again See Air Bag Off Switch in the Index for more on this including important safety information United States 2 82 Canada A CAUTION If the right front passenger s air bag is turned off for a person who isn t in a risk group identified by the national government that person won t have the extra protection of an air bag CAUTION Continued In a crash the air bag wouldn t be able to inflate and help protect the person sittin
254. nfant seat or the infant has a medical condition which according to the infant s physician makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition Child age 1 to 12 A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because my vehicle has no rear seat although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat s whenever possible children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat s of my vehicle or the child has a medical condition which according to the child s physician makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition 1 37 Medical Condition A passenger has a medical condition which according to his or her physician causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk for the passenger and makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning off the air bag and allowing the passenger even if belted to hit the dashboard or windshield in acrash If the right front passenger s air bag is turned off for a person who isn t in a risk group identified by the national government that person won t have the extra protection of an air bag Ina crash the air bag wouldn t be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there Don t turn off the pass
255. nformation see Traction Control in the Index TRANSMISSION HOT If the transmission fluid temperature becomes high the message center will display this message When the transmission enters the protection mode you may notice a change in the transmission shifting patterns When the transmission fluid temperature returns to normal the display will turn off and the transmission shifting patterns will return to normal NOTICE If you keep driving your vehicle with the transmission TRANSMISSION HOT message displayed you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered under your warranty The following situations can cause the transmission to operate at higher temperatures Towing a trailer Hot outside air temperatures Hauling a large or heavy load Low transmission fluid level High transmission fluid level Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary transmission oil cooler A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on a frequent basis see Scheduled Maintenance in the Index for the proper transmission maintenance intervals TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE If the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot this message will appear on the DIC Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle Stop the vehicle and
256. ngine Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle at the opposite end 5 19 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The equipment you ll need is behind and to the side of the driver s side second row seat To remove the equipment do the following 1 Fold the driver s side second row seat down See Rear Seats in the Index 2 Turn the wingnut A which holds the jack counterclockwise to release the jack 3 Turn the wingnut B which holds the jack tool kit counterclockwise to release it Open the tool bag and you will find the following tools which you will use to remove the spare tire and flat tire moa Jack Handle Extension Used for Rear Flats Only Jack Handle Wheel Wrench Ratchet Spanner Wrench Locking Pin If Equipped Not used for tire changing procedure See Power Winch Platform in the Index 5 20 TTT The spare tire and wheel blocks are stored in the rear Follow these instructions to remove the wheel blocks cargo area Remove the tire cover to get to them and spare tire 1 Remove the wheel blocks from the tire retainer plate by turning the wingnut counterclockwise A Spare Tire B Receiver Extension If Equipped Not used for tire changing procedure See Receiver Extension in the Index 2 Place the flat end of th
257. nouncement You will not be able to turn off alert announcements ALERT will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system This feature is not supported by all RDS stations INFO Information If the current station has a message the information symbol will appear on the display Press this button to see the message The message may the artist and song title call in phone numbers etc If the whole message is not displayed parts of it will appear every three seconds To scroll through the message at your own speed press the INFO button repeatedly A new group of words will appear on the display with each press Once the complete message has been displayed the information symbol will disappear from the display until another new message is received 3 15 The old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button until a new message is received or a different station is tuned to When a message is not available from a station NO INFO will be displayed TRAF Traffic Press this button to seek to a station that broadcasts traffic announcements TRAF will appear on the display If no station is found NO TRAF will appear on the display When a traffic announcement comes on the current station or on a related network station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or a compact disc is playing The traffic symbol and TRAFFIC will appear on the display while the traffic announcement pla
258. ns attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please don t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you re with a group designate a driver who will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you re driving on snow or ice it s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle Also see Traction Control System in the Index 4 6 Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That s perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That s reaction time Average reaction time is about 3 4 of a second But that s only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in 3 4 of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an em
259. nsert the adapter into the cassette slot It will power up the radio and begin playing The override feature will remain active until the eject symbol is pressed Playing a Compact Disc Insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing The display will show the CD symbol If you want to insert a compact disc with the ignition off first press the eject symbol or DISP If an error appears on the display see Compact Disc Messages later in this section 1 PREV Previous Press this pushbutton to go to the previous track if the current track has been playing for less than eight seconds If pressed when the current track has been playing for more than eight seconds it will go to the beginning of the current track TRACK and the track number will appear on the display If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once the player will continue moving back through the disc 2 NEXT Press this pushbutton to go to the next track TRACK and the track number will appear on the display If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once the player will continue moving forward through the disc 3 19 3 REV Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly within a track Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six times the normal playing speed Press and hold it for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the norm
260. nt Panel Your Information System 2 76 The main components of your instrument panel are the following A Air Outlets M Driver Information Center Buttons B Exterior Lamps Control N Parking Brake Release C Radio and OnStar Steering Wheel Controls O Traction Control Button D Instrument Panel Cluster P Ride Height Selector Button If Equipped E Locking Rear Axle and All Wheel Drive Buttons Q Tow Haul Selector Button F Audio System R Cigarette Lighter G Air Bag Switch S Shift Lever H Glovebox T Accessory Power Outlets I Rear Wiper Washer Control U OnStar Buttons J Dome Lamp Override Button V Rear Window Defogger Button K Turn Signal Multifunction Lever W Comfort Control System L Tilt Lever 2 77 Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You ll know how fast you re going about how much fuel you have and many other things you ll need to know to drive safely and economically United States version shown Canada similar 2 78 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h Your vehicle s odometer works together with the driver information center You can set a personal trip and business trip odometer See Trip Information Button in the Index for more information The odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle
261. nt defrost or defog the A C off symbol will flash to let you know this is not allowed This is to prevent fogging Kay Front Defrost Press the front defrost button to defrost the windshield The system will automatically control the fan speed if you select defrost from AUTO mode If the outside temperature is 40 F 4 C or warmer your air conditioning compressor will automatically run to help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield Automatic Operation Press the AUTO button to set the system to automatically control the air delivery mode fan speed air temperature and recirculation operations Pressing this button when the system is off will turn the system on When AUTO is selected the air conditioning operation and air inlet will be automatically controlled The air conditioning compressor will run when outside temperature is over approximately 40 F 4 C The air inlet will normally be set to outside air If it s hot outside the air inlet will automatically switch to recirculated inside air to help quickly cool down your vehicle To find your comfort setting start with a 74 F 23 C temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate Turn the driver s or passenger s side temperature knob to adjust the temperature setting as necessary If you choose the temperature setting of 60 F 15 C the system will remain at the maximum cooling setting If you choose the temperature setting
262. nt panel Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish Cleaning Speaker Covers Vacuum around a speaker cover gently so that the speaker won t be damaged Clean spots with just water and mild soap 6 51 Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water 6 52 Cleaning Glass Surfaces Glass should be cleaned often GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index NOTICE Don t use abrasive cleaners on glass because they may cause scratches Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window since they may have to be scraped off later If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window an electric defogger element may be damaged Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the w
263. ny malfunction NOTICE If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after a while your emission controls may not work as well your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty NOTICE Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and may cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test 2 89 This light should come on as a check to show you it is working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light doesn t come on have it repaired This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required e Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required If the Light Is Flashing The
264. o complete 2 74 Using HomeLink Press and hold the appropriate button on HomeLink for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three buttons press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds HomeLink is now in the train learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2 under Programming HomeLink Individual buttons can not be erased but they can be reprogrammed See Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button next Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do not release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds While still holding the HomeLink button proceed with Step 2 under Programming HomeLink Resetting Defaults To reset HomeLink to default settings hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink indicator light turns off and then release both buttons For questions or comments contact HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com 2 75 The Instrume
265. o lane roads in hills or mountains Don t swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane As you go over the top of a hill be alert There could be something in your lane like a stalled car or an accident You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these and take appropriate action 4 49 Winter Driving 4 50 Here are some tips for winter driving Have your vehicle in good shape for winter You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You ll have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful What s the worst time for this Wet ice
266. o the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Now connect the black negative cable to the good battery s negative terminal Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Don t let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable doesn t go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part of the vehicle with the dead battery or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Connect the other end of 10 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and the negative cable to run the engine for awhile the remote negative terminal marked GND on the vehicle with the dead battery 11 Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery If it won t start after a few tries it probably needs service NOTICE Damage to your vehicle may result from electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed incorrectly To prevent electrical shorting take care that they don t touch each other or any other metal The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal B Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals C Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery
267. o turn the system on and off VOLUME Turn the knob to increase or to decrease volume 3 21 AUTO VOL Automatic Volume Your audio system monitors the noise inside your vehicle Then AUTO VOL automatically adjusts the volume so that it always sounds the same to you To use automatic volume press the AUTO VOL button until AVOL ON appears on the display To turn automatic volume off press the AUTO VOL button until AVOL OFF appears on the display RCL Recall Push this knob to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time Time display is available with the ignition turned off Finding a Station BAND Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display will show your selection TUNE Turn this knob to select radio stations K SEEK gt Press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there The radio will seek only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal 3 22 K SCAN gt Press and hold either SCAN arrow for two seconds until SC appears on the display and you hear a beep The radio will go to a station play for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning To scan preset stations press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than four seconds PRESET SCAN will appear on the display You will hear a double beep The radio will go to a preset station stored o
268. o unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt As Ph a cS OS ier ez SS Ss S EN x K PYDNA 4 N p xi The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or a crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor 1 23 Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body OOF E P A al F A SQ The shoulder belt is too loose It won t give nearly as much protection this way 1 24 Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not
269. oap Don t use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index 6 53 Don t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish 6 54 NOTICE Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks Foreign materials such a
270. ogram Press this button to play a station you have programmed on the radio preset buttons on the selected band If a cassette tape is playing press this button to play the other side of the tape If a compact disc is playing in the CD changer press this button to go to the next available CD ASOURCE W Press this button to select AM FM1 FM2 or a source either radio cassette tape or CD The cassette or CD must be loaded to play Available loaded sources are shown on the display as a tape or a CD symbol ASEEK WV Press the up or the down arrow to seek to the next or to the previous radio station and stay there If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing the player will advance with the up arrow and reverse with the down arrow AVOLY Press the up or the down arrow to increase or to decrease volume 3 33 Understanding Radio Reception AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range however can cause stations to interfere with each other AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to come and go Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is t
271. om any campsite before leaving Take extreme care with open fires where permitted camp stoves and lanterns Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system 4 18 Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route You are much less likely to get bad surprises Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads It s also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle If something happens to one of them the other can help quickly Does your vehicle have a winch If so be sure to read the winch instructions In a remote area a winch can be handy if you get stuck But yov ll want to know how to use it properly High Mobility Characteristics The HUMMER H2 has a 12 inch 30 5 cm running ground clearance A and a 9 inch 22 8 cm axle to ground clearance B while maintaining a low silhouette and a low center of gravity These characteristics are essential to safety in off road operation FAH N ys 17 x 10 W S S 0s Bae ram ZA jsl 7 Aia 5 3 REN Ses ag 3 C R a Rees g S 6 2 7 2 IXY XI i OTT TAT KUH RUNY LLL LA RER 1203030 D DS 4 19 The HUMMER H2 has an approach angle of
272. ome things you must not do if you stall or are about to stall when going up a hill Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL N to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This won t work Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control Instead apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle Then apply the parking brake Shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back straight down Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle it s steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around If you can t make it up the hill you must back straight down the hill Q Suppose after stalling I try to back down the hill and decide I just can t do it What should I do Set the parking brake put your transmission in Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can PARK P and turn off the engine Leave the cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill is in PARK P This is because the NEUTRAL side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would position on the transfer case overrides the take if it rolled downhill Do not shift the transfer transmission You or someone else could be case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle injured If you are going to leave your vehicle Leave it in some gear set the parking brake and shift the
273. on t get them the air bag system NOTICE won t be there to help protect you in another crash ae A new system will include air bag modules and If you damage the covering for the driver s or the possibly other parts The service manual for your right front passenger s air bag the bag may not vehicle covers the need to replace other parts work properly You may have to replace the air Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and Dag module I Me Sree nme ce Choline air diagnostic module which records information about bag module and the SAE panel for the the air bag system The module records information right front passenger s air bag Do not open or about the readiness of the system when the system break the air bag coverings commands air bag inflation and driver s safety belt usage at deployment The module also records speed engine rpm brake and throttle data 1 35 Air Bag Off Switch Your vehicle has a switch on the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the right front passenger s air bag Canada This switch should only be turned to AIR BAG OFF if the person in the right front passenger s position is a member of a passenger risk group identified by the national government as follows United States 1 36 Infant An infant less than I year old must ride in the front seat because my vehicle has no rear seat my vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear facing i
274. on if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This may take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness see your dealer or qualified service center to prepare the vehicle for inspection 2 91 Oil Pressure Gage United States Canada The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa kilopascals 2 92 Don t keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing lo
275. on is turned to LOCK 2 20 Starting Your Engine NOTICE Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine won t start in any other position that s a R safety feature To restart when you re already moving Holding your key m START for longer than use NEUTRAL N only 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to NOTICE Don t try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle be drained much sooner And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped hold the ignition key in START When the engine starts let go of the key and let up on the accelerator pedal Wait about 15 seconds between each try 2 Ifit doesn t start within 10 seconds push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor while you 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm 2 21 When starting your engine in very cold weather Engine Coolant Heater if Equipped below 0 F or 18 C do this In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the the engine coolant heater can help Yov ll get easier ignition key to START and hold it there
276. on scrubbing action wet type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own A non scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner The use of a non scrubbing action dry type cleaning cassette is not recommended 3 35 After you clean the player press and hold the eject button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator was reset Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced Care of Your Compact Discs Handle discs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust If the surface of a disc is soiled dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution and clean it wiping from the center to the edge Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge 3 36 Care of Your Compact Disc Player The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism Roof Mast Antenna The roof mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged If it is flattened pull i
277. oo late Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it 3 34 To help avoid hearing loss or damage do the following 1 Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting 2 Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly NOTICE Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle like a tape player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio be sure you can add what you want If you can it s very important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine Delphi Electronics radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly So before adding sound equipment check with your dealer and be sure to check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants direct sunlight and extreme heat If they aren t they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours o
278. or further details At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures Don t forget to check your spare tire See Tires in the Index for further details Cassette Deck Service Clean cassette deck Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play See Audio Systems in the Index for further details At Least Twice a Year Restraint System Check Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield Also see Wiper Blades Cleaning in the Index Weatherstrip Lubrication Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Automatic Transmission Check Check the
279. or unloading The system will suspend leveling if any of the doors or the liftgate are open Once the doors are closed system leveling will continue The system can lower the vehicle to the standard ride height with the engine running and for up to 30 minutes after the ignition has been turned off You may hear the compressor running when you load your vehicle and periodically as the system adjusts the vehicle to the standard ride height Load leveling will not function normally with the inflator hose attached to the inflator outlet Remove the inflator hose from the outlet when it is not in use See Accessory Inflator in the Index Overload and Overheat Protection Overload protection is designed to protect the air suspension system and is an indication to the driver that the vehicle is overloaded If the rear suspension remains at a low height the rear axle load has exceeded GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating When the overload protection mode is activated the compressor operates for about 30 seconds to one minute without raising the vehicle depending on the amount of overload This will continue each time the ignition is turned on until the rear axle load is reduced below GAWR See GAWR in the Index If the system overheats it will shut down and stop all leveling functions until the system cools down During this time the SERVICE AIR SUSPENSION message will appear in the DIC See Driver Information Center in
280. ose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requ
281. ositioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 63 1 64 5 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint If you re using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Rear Seat Position You ll be using the lap belt Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt Put the restraint on the seat Run the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 1 65 1 66 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 To tighten the belt
282. ossibly cause the vehicle to become stuck The locking rear axle will be disabled when the vehicle s wheel speed is greater than 20 mph 32 km h if the vehicle s battery is low and or the transfer case is shifted out of 4LO Lock NOTICE Do not use the locking rear axle on pavement You can damage drivetrain components and this damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty Use only 4HI when traveling on dry pavement 2 41 Tilt Wheel The tilt lever is located on the left side of the steering column under the turn signal lever You should adjust the steering wheel before you drive To tilt the wheel first pull the lever towards you release the lock Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable level and release the lever to lock the wheel in place You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle Horn To sound the horn press the horn symbols on the steering wheel pad 2 42 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following Turn and Lane Change Signals Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Flash to Pass Feature Windshield Wipers Windshield Washer Cruise Control Turn and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn mov
283. ost off road situations klel 4LO Lock This setting sends maximum power to all four wheels You might choose this if you are driving off road in deep sand deep mud and climbing or descending steep hills When in this mode you can also choose to lock the rear axle for additional traction See Locking Rear Axle later in this section Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P You or someone else could be seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL See Parking Brake in the Index NEUTRAL Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle See Towing in the Index for more information Indicator lights in the buttons will show you which position the transfer case is in The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on If the lights do not come on you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service An indicator light will flash while shifting the transfer case It will remain illuminated when the shift is complete If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift it will return to the last chosen setting If the SERVICE 4WD message in the DIC stays on you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service See Service 4WD or Driver Information Center in the Index for further information 2 29
284. othing we put on it can make it impossible to steal However there are ways you can help Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside it s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves so don t do it When you park your vehicle and open the driver s door you ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you Always do this Your ignition and transmission will be locked Also remember to lock the doors If the key is in the ignition with any door open and you try to lock your doors with the power door locks the driver s door will not stay locked This will help to keep you from locking your keys in the vehicle 2 16 Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot close all windows and lock your vehicle Remember to keep your valuables out of sight Put them in a storage area or take them with you Parking Lots Even if you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle it s still best to lock it up and take your keys But what if you have to leave your ignition key What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle Put your valuables in a storage area like your glove box Take the remote keyless entry system transmitter with you Lock all the doors except the driver s Content Theft Deterrent Your vehicle is equipped with a content theft deterrent alarm system With this system the security l
285. ould be seriously injured Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle NOTICE Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this part and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section If yours was built with trailering options as many are it s ready for heavier trailers But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer 4 59 If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll
286. ow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode See Recirculation later in this section Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or increase the cabin temperature The display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing to the passenger will be displayed under and to the right of the temperature setting The passenger s temperature setting can be set to match the driver s temperature setting by pressing and holding the AUTO button for four seconds Both the driver and passenger arrows will be displayed 3 3 Display If you press the MODE button to select an air delivery mode the display will change to show you the selected air delivery mode After ten seconds the display will change to show the driver temperature setting and the selected mode If you press the up or down arrows on the fan switch the display will change to show the selected fan speed After ten seconds the display will change to show the driver temperature setting and the selected mode Whenever you press AUTO the display will change to show the following the current driver s set temperature and an arrow for five seconds the current passenger s set temperature setting and an arrow for five seconds and the automatic air delivery mode and fan speed If the driver s and passenger s temperature settings are the same when AUTO is pres
287. per Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear and cracking See Wiper Blade Check in the Index for more information Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways For proper type and length see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts in the Index To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the following 1 Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is facing away from the windshield 6 40 2 Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly toward the driver s side of the vehicle 3 Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2 Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions Underinflated tires pose the same danger as about your tire warranty and where to obtain service overloaded tires The resulting accident see your Hummer Warranty booklet for details could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous
288. press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone Bass Treble AUDIO Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS or TREB appears on the display Turn the knob to increase or to decrease The display will show the bass or treble level If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the middle position To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed The radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the level display in the middle position AUTO EQ Automatic Equalization Press this button to choose equalization settings Your audio system allows you to choose from four different equalization settings normal driver rear and spacious These settings can be used while listening to the radio the cassette tape or the CD player NORMAL This setting enhances the stereo effect DRIVER This setting gives the driver the best sound quality REAR This setting gives the rear seat passengers the best sound quality SPACIOUS This setting makes the listening space seem larger The radio will save separate
289. problem when you drive across a hill Loose gravel muddy spots or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit something that will trip it a rock a rut etc and roll over 4 34 Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression your vehicle can tilt even more For reasons like these you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline doesn t mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over Driving across an incline that s too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline don t drive across it Find another route instead Q What if I m driving across an incline that s not too steep but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill What should I do A If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping However a much better way to prevent this is to get out and walk the course so you know what the surface is like before you drive it Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you re crossing an incline be sure you and yo
290. ps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system will come on when the following conditions are met The ignition is on the exterior lamps control is in AUTO the transmission is not in PARK P and e the light sensor determines it is daytime When the DRL are on only your DRL lamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker and other lamps won t be on The instrument panel won t be lit up either When it begins to get dark the automatic headlamp system will switch from DRL to the headlamps As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Off Road Lamps If Equipped The off road lamps button is located on the overhead console To use the lamps the engine must be running with the transmission in a drive gear Remove the covers from the lamps and press the button to turn the off road lamps on Press the button again to turn them off An indicator light will glow near the button when the lamps are on The off road lamps will be cancelled when the ignition is turned off If you still want to use the lamps after you restart the vehicle you will need to press the off road lamp button again Interior Lamps Instrument Panel Brightness Control The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to the exterior lamps control ee Instrument Panel Lights Turn the thumbwheel located next to the exterior lamps control up or down to brighten or dim the
291. pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint If you re using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children LATCH in the Index Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag Never put a rear facing child restraint in this seat Here s why A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in the rear seat Although a rear seat is a safer place you can secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag There s a switch on the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the right front passenger s air bag when you want to secure a rear facing child restraint at the right front passenger s position See Air Bag Off Switch
292. push the seatback forward Folding the Seatback If the seatback isn t locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked Unfolding the Seatback 1 To return the seat to the passenger position pull up on the release lever labeled 1 and then pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright position 2 Push forward on the seatback to make sure it is locked into position 1 10 Tilting the Seat If the seatback isn t locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked 1 Fold the seatbacks forward using the instructions listed previously 2 Unlatch the seat from the floor by pulling up on the lever labeled 2 located on the rear of the seat 3 Lift the rear of the seat up off of the floor and push it forward until it locks into place You will not be able to unlatch the seat from the floor unless the seatback is folded down The seat will now remain locked in the upright position 1 11 Returning the Seat to an Upright Position 4 Push down on the seat firmly Try pulling it up to be To return the seat to an upright position do the site atis lockedinto place following 5 Pull up on the release lever labeled 1 and then pull up on the seatback until
293. r than the GVWR or either the maximum front or rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading This will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your truck can carry Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they ll keep going Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Don t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Don t leave a seat folded down unless you need to There s also important loading information for off road driving in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving in the Index
294. r vehicle has air bags one air bag for the driver and another air bag for the right front passenger Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating air bag But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations 1 30 Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren t wearing your safety belt even if you have air bags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don t replace them Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something They aren t designed to inflate at all in rollover rear or low speed frontal crashes or in many side crashes And for some unrestrained occupants air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there s an air bag for that person Air bags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you re too close to an inflating air bag as you would be if you were leaning forward it could seriously injure you Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Al
295. rated corrosion rust can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection 6 56 At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ringlet shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this Hummer will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials DESCRIPTION USAGE Polishing Cloth Wax Treated Interior and exterior polishing cloth Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar road oil and asphalt Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome or stainless steel White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl tops upholstery and convertible tops Glass Cleaner Removes dirt grime smoke and fingerprints Chrome
296. red don t use the restraint unless it is anchored properly If the child restraint does not have a top strap one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top strap and that the strap be anchored In the United States some child restraints also have a top strap If your child restraint has a top strap it should be anchored 1 57 Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor points Be sure to use an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed Raise the head restraint and route the top strap under it Once you have the top strap anchored you ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer s instructions say A child restraint with a top strap should only be used in the second or third row Don t use a child restraint with a top strap in the front seat because there s no place to anchor the top strap An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position in the second row and for the right outside seating position in the third row 1 58 Second Row Seats Third Row Seat Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children LATCH System Yo
297. respond in a timely manner or at all OnStar Steering Wheel Control e A You can use the steering wheel control to interact with the OnStar system See the OnStar manual provided with your vehicle for more information 2 69 Sunroof Option To open the sunroof and sunshade press and hold the rear side of the button located on the overhead console until the sunroof reaches the desired position or until it stops at the built in comfort position The comfort position stops the sunroof from opening completely To open the sunroof past the comfort position press and hold the rear side of the button again until the sunroof reaches the desired position or until it stops This will be the full open position 2 70 To close the sunroof press and hold the front side of the button until the sunroof reaches the desired position or until it is fully closed If you are closing the sunroof completely be sure to hold the button down until the glass stops moving To adjust the sunshade pull it backward or forward to the desired position Although the sunshade opens automatically when opening the sunroof it must be manually pulled closed after closing the sunroof The sunshade can not be opened further than the open position of the sunroof Vent Position The vent position allows you to open the rear of the sunroof by tilting it upward To use the vent position start with the sunroof closed then press and hold the front s
298. retainer arrow counterclockwise to unlock the bulb socket You may prefer to unplug the electrical connector before removing the bulb socket If so complete Step 4 before doing this step Pull the bulb socket straight out from the headlamp housing Unplug the electrical Front Turn Signal Parking Lamp connector To change this bulb do the following 1 Open the hood as described earlier in this section and locate the affected lamp 2 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the lamp housing 5 Push the new bulb socket into the headlamp assembly being sure to align the splines on the bulb socket with the splines in the headlamp housing Use care not to touch the bulb with your fingers or hands 6 Turn the bulb socket retainer clockwise to lock the 3 Pull the bulb from the bulb socket bulb socket in place 4 Put the new bulb into the bulb socket 5 Put the bulb socket into the lamp housing and turn it clockwise until it locks 7 Plug in the electrical connector 6 35 Daytime Running Lamp 3 Remove the bulb from the bulb socket To change this bulb do the following 4 Put the new bulb into the bulb socket 5 Put the bulb socket into the lamp housing and i a the turn it clockwise until it locks front bumper It is Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL easiest to come 1n from the side of the It is recommended that this component be replaced as a vehicle through the unit by your d
299. rly in steep country or if you re planning to visit there here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable See Off Road Driving in the Index for information about driving off road Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transmission These parts can work hard on mountain roads Know how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill If you don t shift down your brakes could get Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from so hot that they wouldn t work well You would driving in flat or rolling terrain then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope 4 48 Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down They could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill Know how to go uphill You may want to shift down to a lower gear The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission and you can climb the hill better Stay in your own lane when driving on tw
300. rms hands feet and body you ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce 4 24 Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed Here are some things to keep in mind At higher speeds you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles you have less time to react you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles you ll need more distance for braking especially since you re on an unpaved surface When you re driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose control and crash So whether you re driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear Safety belts Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features Here are some things to consider Surface Conditions Off roading can take you over hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the steering acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways Depending upon the kind of surface you are on you may experience slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obsta
301. rring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds 8 11
302. running Simply press the trip stem on the instrument panel cluster You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed The new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the old odometer Tachometer Your tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm NOTICE Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the shaded warning area or engine damage will occur 2 79 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they re working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there s a problem with your vehicle 2 80 When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of
303. s For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Head Restraints Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash To raise or lower a head restraint pull up on the head restraint or push the head restraint down The head restraints tilt forward also To tilt a head restraint forward grab the top of the restraint and pull it toward you until you hear a click Let go of the head restraint and it will stay in that position If you want the head restraint to tilt forward more pull it forward again until you hear a click You can pull it forward up to three times and on the fourth pull it will release to the initial upright position Rear Seats 60 40 Split Bench Seat Second Row The 60 40 split bench seat can be folded to give you more cargo space Folding the Seatbacks If the seatback isn t locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked To fold the rear seat do the following 1 Insert the two safety belt buckles into the pockets on the driver s side seatback and place the passenger s side seat belt through the loop located near the armrest before folding the rear seat
304. s reimbursement up to 30 per day five days maximum may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus In addition should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to 10 per day five day maximum may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts Courtesy Rental Vehicle When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight warranty repairs your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained at actual cost up to a maximum of 30 00 per day supported by receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty
305. s you ll go about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower 2 48 Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you may want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down Of course applying the brake takes you out of cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don t use cruise control on steep hills Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to turn off the cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal move the cruise switch to off or shift the transmission to NEUTRAL N Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition your cruise control set speed memory is erased Exterior Lamps A CLOUT Ta i The control on the driver s side of your instrument panel operates the exterior lamps The exterior lamp control has four positions AUTO Turn the control to this position to put the system into automatic headlamp mode The Daytime Running Lamps DRL will also be activated if it is light enough outside A light near the symbol wi
306. s are available when warranty repairs are required This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs Plan Ahead When Possible When your vehicle requires warranty service you should contact your dealer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait HUMMER helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repair
307. s calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts Cleaning Aluminum Wheels Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Don t use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abras
308. s section Your vehicle s mirrors will also be capable of performing the curb view assist mirror function This feature will cause the passenger s and or driver s mirror to tilt to a preselected position when the vehicle is in REVERSE R This feature may be useful in allowing you to view the curb when you are parallel parking When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE R and a short delay has occurred the passenger s and or driver s mirror will return to its original position To change the preselected tilt position adjust the mirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is in REVERSE R When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE R this new position is saved in memory as the tilt position This feature can be enabled disabled through the Driver Information Center See Personalization Features in the Index for more information Storage Compartments Your vehicle includes a number of compartments for storage of often used items Glove Box To open your glove box pull the lever upward and pull the door downward 2 57 Overhead Console Center Console Storage Area Your vehicle is equipped with either a short or long Your vehicle has a console compartment between the overhead console bucket seats To open a door on the long console push on the rear To open it press the button on the side and swing the edge of the door and let it swing open Push the door up console lid open The console inclu
309. sed the temperature setting and both arrows will be displayed for five seconds along with the automatic air delivery mode and fan speed After the five second update the display will change to show the temperature setting both arrows and AUTO 3 4 Manual Operation You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan speed Use the mode button to cycle through the following four air delivery modes 7 Panel This setting will deliver air to the instrument panel outlets ape 74 Bi Level This setting will deliver warmer air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets srd Floor This setting will deliver air to the floor outlets We tr Defog This setting will deliver air to the floor and windshield outlets Off Press this button to turn the system off Some fresh air will continue to flow through the vehicle from the floor outlets The system will try to maintain the previously chosen temperature setting The display will be blank Press the up or down arrows on the fan switch the mode button or the AUTO button to turn the system on when it is off The air delivery modes and temperature selections may still be used while the system is off This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless the system is set to recirculation mode See Recirculation later in this section KG Recirculation Press this button to limit th
310. sert multiple discs do the following 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD button for two seconds You will hear a beep and the light located to the right of the slot will begin to flash 3 Once the light stops flashing and turns green load a disc Insert the disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull the disc in Once the disc is loaded the light will begin flashing again Once the light stops flashing and turns green you can load another disc The disc player takes up to six discs Do not try to load more than six To load more than one disc but less than six complete Steps 1 through 3 When you have finished loading discs with the radio on or off press the LOAD side of the LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded When a disc is inserted the CD symbol will be displayed If more than one disc has been loaded a number for each disc will be displayed If you select an equalization setting for your disc it will be activated each time you play a disc If the radio is on or off the last disc loaded will begin to play automatically 4 As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display Playing a Specific Loaded Compact Disc For every CD loaded a number will appear on the radio display To play a specific CD first press the CD AUX button to start playing a CD Then press the num
311. setting If you want to use the automatic mode press AUTO and adjust the temperature by turning the temperature knob The heater works best if you keep the windows closed while using it Defogging and Defrosting On cool humid days use defog to keep the windshield and side windows clear Use front defrost to remove fog or ice from the windshield quickly in extremely humid or cold conditions When using manual operation choose defog and adjust the fan speed to your comfort level When using front defrost increase the temperature and fan speed settings If you use the automatic operation and you select front defrost or defog from AUTO the system will control the fan speed Adjust the temperature and fan speed to your comfort level After the windshield is clear adjust the temperature to your normal setting and select the AUTO button and return to AUTO mode and fan control For maximum front defrost performance under extreme icing or frosting conditions increase the temperature setting to 90 F 32 C and increase the fan speed to high Rear Window Defogger The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass Press the button to start warming your window A light will glow in the button while the defogger is working This button will also activate the heated mirrors After 10 minutes it will turn off by itself or press the button during the heating cycle to turn it off If you need additional warming time push
312. shows the vehicle s average speed for the personal trip PERSONAL ANNUAL This shows the ratio of personal trip miles to annual miles as a percent 2 96 Business Trip If the BUSINESS TRIP is on turn it on or off by pressing the select button you will also be able to scroll through the following BUSINESS XX MI This shows the current distance traveled since the last reset for the business trip odometer in either miles or kilometers BUSINESS XX X MPG This shows the amount of fuel used for the business trip BUSINESS AVG ECONOMY This shows how many miles per gallon of fuel your vehicle is getting for the business trip based on current and past driving conditions BUSINESS AVG MPH This shows the vehicle s average speed for the business trip BUSINESS ANNUAL This shows the ratio of business trip miles to annual miles as a percent To reset the personal or business trip information do the following press and hold select button for two seconds while in one of the personal or business trip modes This will reset all of the information for the personal or business trip You can also reset the PERSONAL XX MI or BUSINESS XX MI while they are displayed by pressing the reset stem on the cluster If you press and hold the reset stem or select button for four seconds the display will show the distance traveled since the last ignition cycle for the personal or business trip Season Odometer
313. sketballs air mattresses and bicycle tires The air inflator is located in the rear compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle The air inflator kit is located in the spare tire cover The kit includes a 22 foot 6 7 m hose with three nozzle adapters The engine must be running and the gearshift lever must be in PARK P for the inflator to operate 2 64 To use the air inflator attach the appropriate nozzle adapter to the end of the hose if required Then attach the end of the hose to the object you wish to inflate Remove the dust cover from the outlet and attach the hose to the outlet Press and release the switch to turn the inflator on or off When the inflator is on an indicator light will be lit When done with the inflator place the inflator kit accessories in the pouch and store it properly If your vehicle is equipped with the air suspension system load leveling will not occur with the inflator hose attached to the inflator outlet See Air Suspension in the Index Inflating something too much can make it explode and you or others could be injured Be sure to read the inflator instructions and inflate any object only to its recommended pressure Accessory Power Outlets With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems Your vehicle is equipped with five accessor
314. smission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions You may also want to activate the tow haul mode if the transmission shifts too often See Tow Haul Mode in the Index When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the automatic transmission in PARK P for a few minutes before turning the engine off If you do get the overheat warning see Engine Overheating in the Index 4 67 Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s how to do it 1 Apply your regular brakes but don t shift into PARK P yet 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and shift into PARK P 5 Release the regular brakes 4 68 It can be dangerous to get out
315. ssary to modulate your brake pedal and accelerator to avoid spin out Ease the vehicle down from the log with your brake There are some hills that simply can t be driven no matter how well built the vehicle Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you can t control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness don t drive the hill _ _ _ _ _ gt 200000000000 Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill you need to decide if it s one of those hills that s just too steep to climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top On a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs 4 28 Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill Is there a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places Is there good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won t have to make turning maneuvers Are there obstru
316. starting terminal and a remote negative jump starting terminal The remote positive terminal is located behind a red plastic cover near the engine accessory To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set drive bracket See Engine Compartment Overview the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the Index for more information on location in the jump start procedure Put an automatic To uncover the remote positive terminal transmission in PARK P or a manual transmission open the red plastic cover in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake The remote negative terminal marked GND 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug is located on the engine accessory drive bracket unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index lighter or accessory power outlets Turn off all lamps for more information on location that aren t needed as well as radios This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries In addition it could save your radio You should always use the remote positive and the remote negative terminals instead of the positive and negative terminals on your battery OTICE If you leave your radio on it could be badly damaged The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded
317. t back up for best reception Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened to the roof mount If tightening is required tighten it by hand Chime Level Adjustment The volume level of the vehicle s chimes can be controlled by the radio To change the volume level press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power off The chime volume level will change from the normal level to loud and LOUD will be displayed on the radio To change back to the default or normal setting press and hold pushbutton 6 again The chime level will change from the loud level to normal and NORMAL will be displayed Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Here you ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions We ve also included many other useful tips on driving Defensive Driving Drunken Driving Control of a Vehicle Braking Traction Control System Steering Off Road Recovery Passing Loss of Control Off Road Driving Driving at Night Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads PRARARARAREADL I BWR RRR Rr ODAWLN SONDNMNWWre 4 43 4 44 4 46 4 47 4 48 4 50 4 54 4 56 4 57 4 70 4 72 City Driving Freeway Driving Before Leaving on a Long Trip Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Winter Driving Recreational Vehicle Towing Loading Your Vehicle Towing a Trailer Front Receiver Power Winch Platform If Equipped Defensive Driving The best
318. t to lift the hood but to get service help right away 5 11 Cooling System If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling a don t do anything else until it cools down The vehicle When you decide it s safe to lift the hood here s what should be parked on a level surface yov ll see The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark If it isn t you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system A Coolant Surge Tank B Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap C Engine Fan 5 12 NOTICE Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn t covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode in the Index for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Don t touch them If you do you can be burned Don t run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle NOTICE If there seems to be no leak start the engine again ree The engine cooling fan speed should increase when When adding coolant it is important that you idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant down If it doesn
319. te 3 Tighten the nut D by hand until tire retainer plate C is snug against the tire Then use the ratchet and spanner to tighten the nut firmly Try to move the tire back and forth slightly to be sure it is secure 4 Reattach the wheel blocks E to the tire retainer plate C and tighten the wing nut 5 Reinstall the tire cover onto the spare or flat tire Follow these instructions to store the jack and tools 1 Lower the jack completely 2 Place the jack in the mounting bracket 3 Tighten the wingnut A until the jack is securely fastened 4 Place the tools in the bag 5 Slide the securing clip over the bag and secure the bag to the floor by tightening the wingnut B to the stud coming out of the floor In order to reduce the potential of the jack squeaking or rattling you will need to preload the jack so it fits tightly in the mounting bracket To do this turn the u hook clevis at the top of the jack clockwise until the jack is held tight in the mounting bracket 5 29 If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you don t want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you re stuck but you must use caution If you let your tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transmission or other parts of the vehi
320. te Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type Press and hold BAND for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on AF ON will appear on the display The radio may switch to stronger stations Press and hold BAND again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off AF OFF will appear on the display The radio will not switch to other stations When you turn the ignition off and then on again the alternate frequency feature will be at the last setting selected Setting Preset PTY Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite PTYs These buttons have factory PTY presets You can set up to 12 PTYs six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2 2 Press the SEEK TYPE button to activate program type select mode 3 Turn the P TYPE LIST knob to select a PTY 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the PTY you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton RDS Messages ALERT Alert warns of local or national emergencies When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station ALERT will appear on the display You will hear the announcement even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing If the cassette tape or compact disc player is playing play will stop during the an
321. ter Liftgate Handle Pivot Points Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Squeaks Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No U S 12346241 in Canada 10953474 or equivalent Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Part No U S 12345579 in Canada 1974984 or equivalent Synthetic Grease with Teflon Superlube GM Part No U S 12371287 in Canada 10953437 or equivalent 7 23 Part E Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services or Periodic Maintenance can be added on the following record pages Also you should retain all maintenance receipts Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED 7 24 Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here you will find out how to contact HUMMER if you need assistance This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects 8 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8 7 Canadian Roadside Assistance 8 3 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone 8 7 Courtesy Transportation
322. that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid 6 19 Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C Athigh speed for quite a while In heavy traffic especially in hot weather While pulling a trailer To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it s colder than 50 F 10 C drive the vehicle in THIRD 3 until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off but this is used only as a reference Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50 F 10 C or more If it s colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to idle the engine longer Should the fluid level be low during this cold check you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level 6 20 Checking the Fluid Level Prepare your vehicle
323. the Index for more information Selectable Extended Rear Ride Height If Equipped This feature comes as part of the electronically controlled air suspension system The selectable rear ride height allows you to raise the rear of the vehicle approximately 2 inches 5 cm over the normal ride height This can be helpful when driving off road where you may need more ground clearance to clear an obstacle The button that controls this feature is located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel 2 39 To use this feature ensure that the following conditions To lower the vehicle to the normal ride height press the are met button again The light in the button will flash as the suspension lowers When the light in the button stops flashing and goes out the suspension has reached the normal ride height Besure all the doors are fully closed The suspension will not raise or lower if a door is open Be sure the vehicle speed is less than 35 mph 56 km h The system will not activate otherwise This feature will lower the vehicle to the normal height if vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph 32 km h Press the height control button to raise the rear of You may also want to use this feature when ascending the vehicle descending or cresting a steep hill as this can help A light in the button will begin to flash as the rear of the prevent the rear bumper from dragging on the base vehicle rises Once the extende
324. the cruise control is engaged Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This of course shuts off the cruise control But you don t need to reset it Once you re going about 25 mph 40 km h or more you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to resume accelerate You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there If you hold the switch at resume accelerate the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake So unless you want to go faster don t hold the switch at resume accelerate 2 47 Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Press the button at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal You ll now cruise at the higher speed Move the cruise switch from on to resume accelerate Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want and then release the switch To increase your speed in very small amounts move the switch briefly to resume accelerate Each time you do this your vehicle will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control Press in the button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want then release it To slow down in very small amounts briefly press the set button Each time you do thi
325. the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other the alignment may need to be reset If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your wheels may need to be rebalanced Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of w
326. tion on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases RETAIL SELL PRICE 50 00 Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle In Canada information pertaining to Product Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General Motors dealer or by calling 1 800 GMDRIVE 1 800 463 7483 Owner s Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner s Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 Without Portfolio Owner s Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 Current and Past Model Order Forms Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time Visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at www helminc com For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incu
327. tions and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on tilt mirror in reverse see Curb View Assist Mirror in the Index 2 103 Easy Exit Seat Press the personalization button until EASY EXIT SEAT appears in the display To select your personalization for seat position exit press the select button while SEAT POSITION EXIT is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices SEAT POSITION EXIT OFF default The driver s seat will move to the exit position when the key is removed from the ignition SEAT POSITION EXIT ON No seat exit recall will occur Choose one of the two options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on seat position exit see Memory Seat and Mirrors in the Index 2 104 Display Units ENG MET Press the personalization button until DISPLAY UNITS appears in the display To select English or metric press the select button while DISPLAY UNITS is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices e UNITS ENGLISH UNITS METRIC If you choose English all information will be displayed in English units For example distance in miles and fuel economy in miles per gallon Choose one of the two options and press the perso
328. to turn song list on S LIST will appear on the display 3 30 3 Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired track to be deleted 4 Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two seconds After two seconds of pressing the SONG LIST button continuously one beep will be heard to confirm that the track has been deleted After a track has been deleted the remaining tracks are moved up the list When another track is added to the song list the track will be added to the end of the list To delete the entire song list perform the following steps 1 Turn the disc player on 2 Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on S LIST will appear on the display 3 Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more than four seconds Two beeps will be heard after four seconds S LIST EMPTY will appear on the display indicating that the song list has been deleted If a disc is ejected and the song list contains saved tracks from that disc those tracks are automatically deleted from the song list Any tracks saved to the song list again are added to the bottom of the list To end song list mode press the SONG LIST button S LIST will be removed from the display Compact Disc Messages CHECK CD If this message appears on the radio display it could be due to of the following reasons You re driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the disc should play The disc is dirty scratched wet or upside down
329. to work Press this pushbutton to go to the previous selection on the tape if the current selection has been playing for less than three seconds If pressed when the current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or the beginning of the current selection depending upon the position on the tape If pressed when the current selection has been playing for more than 13 seconds it will go to the beginning of the current selection SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display while the cassette player is in the previous mode Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the number of selections to be searched back up to 9 2 NEXT Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for next to work Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the tape If you press the pushbutton more than once the player will continue moving forward through the tape SEEK and a positive number will appear on the display 3 REV Reverse Press this pushbutton to reverse the tape rapidly Press it again to return to playing speed The radio will play while the tape reverses The station frequency and REV will appear on the display You may select stations during reverse operation by using the TUNE and SEEK 4 FWD Forward Press this pushbutton to advance quickly to another part of the tape Press this pushbutton again to return to playing spe
330. transmission fluid level add if needed See Automatic Transmission Fluid in the Index A fluid loss may indicate a problem Check the system and repair if needed At Least Once a Year Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D Body Lubrication Service Lubricate all body door hinges hood latch assembly secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl liftgate hinge liftgate linkage liftgate handle pivot points latch bolt locks and folding seat hardware Part D tells you what to use More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment 7 17 Starter Switch Check When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake See Parking Brake in the Index if necessary Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The starter should work only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If the starter works in any other position your vehicle needs service 7 18 Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check 1 When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Fol
331. ts Properly 1 53 1 22 Driver Position 1 72 1 29 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 75 1 30 Right Front Passenger Position 1 75 1 30 Air Bag System 1 76 1 42 Rear Seat Passengers Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Center Passenger Position Children Restraint Systems for Children Older Children Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the seats how to adjust them and fold them up and down It also tells you about reclining front seatbacks and head restraints Power Seats Horizontal Control You can adjust your vehicle s front seats with the horizontal control located on the outboard edge of each front seat Raise or lower the front of the seat by raising or lowering the forward edge of the control Raise or lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering the rear edge of the control Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the whole control toward the front or toward the rear of the vehicle Moving the whole control up or down raises or lowers the entire seat cushion Vertical Control You can use the vertical control to adjust the angle of the seatback Move the reclining front seatback forward or rearward by moving the control toward the front or toward the rear of the vehicle Power Lumbar Control Use the lumbar control located on the outboard side of t
332. tton while HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices HEADLAMP DELAY 10 SEC default HEADLAMP DELAY 20 SEC HEADLAMP DELAY 40 SEC HEADLAMP DELAY 60 SEC HEADLAMP DELAY 120 SEC HEADLAMP DELAY 180 SEC HEADLAMP DELAY OFF The amount of time you choose will be the amount of time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off the vehicle If you choose off the headlamps will turn off as soon as you turn off the vehicle Choose one of the seven options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature Curb View Assist Press the personalization button until CURB VIEW ASSIST appears in the display To select your personalization for curb view assist press the select button while CURB VIEW ASSIST is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices CURB VIEW OFF default Neither outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R CURB VIEW PASSENGER The passenger s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R CURB VIEW DRIVER The driver s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R CURB VIEW BOTH The driver s and passenger s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R Choose one of the four op
333. ture drops to a safe operating temperature ENGINE OVERHEATED If the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for operation this message will appear in the DIC and you will hear a chime Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage This message will clear when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature OIL PRESSURE LOW If low oil pressure levels occur this message will be displayed on the DIC and a chime will sound Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced REDUCED ENGINE POWER This message is displayed when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode See Engine Overheating in the Index for further information BATTERY NOT CHARGING If the battery is not charging during operation this message will appear on the DIC Driving with this problem could drain your battery Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display SERVICE AIR BAG If there is a problem with the air bag system this message will be displayed on the DIC Have a qualified technician inspect the system for problems Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear
334. turers Association and endorsed by the Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection Gasolines meeting these specifications could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines In Canada look for the Auto Makers Choice label on the fuel pump Canada Only California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards see the underhood emission control label it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on see Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index and your vehicle may fail a smog check test If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs may not be covered by your warranty Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing your emission control system to work properly You should not have to add anything to your fuel Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and et
335. turn off all your accessories such as the radio and air conditioner 2 83 Voltmeter When the engine is running the gage shows the condition of the charging system Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone If you must drive turn off all unnecessary accessories Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible 2 84 Brake System Warning Light When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on when you set your parking brake The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn t release fully If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released it means you have a brake problem If you try to drive with the parking brake engaged a chime will sound and the parking brake indicator will flash With the ignition on the brake system warning light will flash when you set the parking
336. tween an occupant and an air bag and don t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering When should an air bag inflate An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system s designed threshold level If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn t move or deform the threshold level is about 9 to 17 mph 14 to 27 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform such as a parked car the threshold level will be higher The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts because inflation would not help the occupant In any particular crash no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near frontal impacts The air bag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain As always wear your safety belt See Off Road Driving in the Index for more tips on off road driving What makes a
337. two additional systems that need lubrication Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Periodic Maintenance Inspections in the Index How to Check Lubricant A Fill Plug B Drain Plug To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten the plug What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 6 23 Front Axle When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Lubricant 6 24 To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you may need to add some lubricant When the differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1 2 inch 12 mm below the filler plug hole When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to us
338. uctions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward facing child restraint See Seats in the Index 2 Put the restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 1 70 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 6 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint If you re using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger 1 71 Older Children
339. ued 2 24 You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is racing running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Don t shift into a drive gear while your engine is racing NOTICE Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine racing isn t covered by your warranty DRIVE D This position is for normal driving If you need more power for passing and you re Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push your accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down You ll shift down to the next gear and have more power DRIVE D can be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving You
340. ugh the high medium and low settings To turn off the heated seats press the button a fourth time An indicator light will illuminate for each heat setting any time the heated seats are operating The heated seats will be canceled after the ignition is turned to OFF If you still want to use the heated seat feature after you restart your vehicle you will need to press the heated seat button again 1 16 Safety Belts They re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts And it explains the air bag system Don t let anyone ride where he or she can t wear a safety belt properly If you are in a crash and you re not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Your vehicle has a light that
341. uld be locked with the door key after the doors are closed e Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote keyless entry transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm If you set off the alarm by accident unlock any door with the key You can also turn off the alarm by pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by turning on the engine with the correct ignition key The alarm won t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way 2 18 Testing the Alarm The alarm can be tested by following these steps 1 From inside the vehicle lower the driver s window and open the driver s door 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the security light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm While the alarm is set the power door unlock switch is not operational If the alarm does not sound when it should but the headlamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not flash the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer Passlock Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock theft d
342. ulling up on the top of the switch Lockout Switch Press the lockout switch to prevent passengers from operating the power windows A small light in the lockout switch will come on to show that the switch has been activated Press the lockout switch again to return to normal operation Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons A child or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move Don t leave the keys in a vehicle with children Your vehicle has a double sided key for the ignition and all door locks If you ever lose a key your dealer will be able to assist you with obtaining replacements NOTICE Your vehicle has a number of new features that can help prevent theft But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your key inside You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in So be sure you have an extra key In an emergency contact roadside assistance See Roadside Assistance in the Index for more information If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar system with an active subscription and you lock your keys inside the vehicle OnStar may be able to send a command to unlock your vehicle See OnStar in the Index for more information Door Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle You can use the remote
343. unloaded Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy Tow haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load 4 61 Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important And it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle Use the following chart to determine how much your trailer can weigh based upon your vehicle model and options Axle Engine Ratio Max Trailer Wt GCWR 6000 V8 4 10 6 700 Ibs 3 039 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg Tongue weight should be 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight 670 1b 303 kg maximum The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversions The GCWR for your vehicle should not be exceeded 4 62 You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at the address listed in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue Th
344. ur passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over yov ll be right in its path If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path 4 35 Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand your wheels won t get good traction You can t accelerate as quickly turning is more difficult and you ll need longer braking distances It s best to use a low gear when you re in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don t get stuck When you drive on sand you ll sense a change in wheel traction But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is On loosely packed sand as on beaches or sand dunes your tires will tend to sink into the sand This has an effect on steering accelerating and braking You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand This will improve traction Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers 4 36 Hard packed snow and ice off
345. ur vehicle has the LATCH system You ll find anchors A in the outboard positions for the second row seats where the seatback meets the seat cushion To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child restraint system each seating position with the LATCH system will have a visible metal anchorage point in the seat where the seatback meets the seat cushion 1 59 In order to use the system you need either a forward facing child restraint that has attaching points B at its base and a top tether anchor C or a rear facing child restraint that has attaching points B as shown here With this system use the LATCH system instead of the vehicle s safety belts to secure a child restraint 1 60 If a LATCH type child restraint isn t attached to its anchorage points the restraint won t be able to protect a child sitting there In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Make sure that a LATCH type child restraint is properly installed using the anchorage points or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint See Child Restraints in the Index for information on how to secure a child restraint in your vehicle using the vehicle s safety belts Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System 1 Find the anchors for the seating position you want to use where the bottom of the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion Put the child restraint on the
346. ure Tire Inspection and Rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certification Tire label Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque in the Index Tires should be rotated every 6 000 to 8 000 miles 10 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It s Time for New Tires and Wheel Replacement later in this section for more information The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which is the most important See Scheduled Maintenance it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose Services in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index When rotating your tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here 6 43 When It s Time for New Tires One way to tell when it s time for new tires is to c
347. vary by manufacturer You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons begin with Step 2 of Programming HomeLink Do not repeat Step 1 2 73 Gate Operator and Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission This may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to Canadian law some U S gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulty programming a gate operator by using the Programming HomeLink procedures regardless of where you live replace Step 3 under Programming HomeLink with the following Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has been successfully accepted by HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly Proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink t
348. vehicle You don t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system To purchase a service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index For up to 2 minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an air bag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates Avoid yellow wires wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow connectors They are probably part of the air bag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Q If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the front of my vehicle will it keep the air bags from working properly A As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle s basic structure isn t changed it s not likely to keep the air bags from working properly in a crash Q Is there anything I might add to the front of the vehicle that could keep the air bags from working properly A Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system front end sheet metal or height they may keep the air bag system from working properly Also the
349. vehicle in position on a hill On cold days approximately 32 F 0 C or colder your transmission is designed to shift differently until the engine reaches normal operating temperature This is intended to improve heater performance Tow Haul Mode Your vehicle is equipped TOW HAUL with a tow haul mode The button is located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel n You can use this feature to assist when towing or hauling a heavy load See Tow Haul Mode in the Index for more information 2 27 All Wheel Drive With all wheel drive you can send your engine s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction To get the most satisfaction out of all wheel drive you must be familiar with its operation Read the part that follows before using all wheel drive NOTICE Driving in the 4HI Lock or 4LO Lock positions for a long time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of your vehicle s drivetrain and tires 2 28 Transfer Case Buttons The transfer case buttons are located to the right of the steering wheel on the instrument panel Use these buttons to shift into and out of the different all wheel drive modes You can choose among three driving settings olal 4H This setting is for driving in most street and highway situations You can also use this setting for variable off road conditions ol4 U 4HI Lock Use this when you need extra traction in m
350. ven come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications in the Index for the wheel nut torque specification 5 27 NOTICE Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications in the Index for the wheel nut torque specification 12 When you reinstall the wheel and tire you must also reinstall the center cap Place the cap on the wheel and tap it into place until it seats flush with the wheel 5 28 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools Use the art and text following to help you store the flat or spare tire and tools back in their proper spot when you are done Store the flat or spare tire back inside the vehicle on the spare tire mount A Spare or Flat Tire C Tire Retainer Plate B Receiver Extension D Nut If Equipped E Wheel Blocks 1 Slide the flat or spare tire A onto the tire carrier 2 Slide the tire retainer plate C into the wheel opening Be sure that the stud attached to the tire carrier passes through the hole in the tire retainer pla
351. w oil pressure Security Light This light will come on briefly when you turn the key toward START The light will stay on until the engine starts If the light flashes the Passlock system has entered a tamper mode If the vehicle fails to start see Passlock in the Index If the light comes on continuously while driving and stays on there may be a problem with the Passlock system Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock and you should see your dealer Also see Content Theft Deterrent in the Index for additional information regarding the security light Cruise Light The cruise light comes on amp whenever you set your cruise control See Cruise Control in the Index Tow Haul Light This light is displayed when the tow haul mode has been activated For more information see Tow Haul Mode in the Index 2 93 Fuel Gage Canada United States When the ignition is on the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left in your tank The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of fuel and you should get more fuel as soon as possible 2 94 Here are some situations you may experience with your fuel gage None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage At the gas station the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated For example the gage may have ind
352. ways wear your safety belt even with air bags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Anyone who is up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants CAUTION Continued Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see the part of this manual called Children There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the air bag symbol The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Air Bag Readiness Light in the Index for more information 1 31 How the Air Bag System Works The right front passenger s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side Where are the air bags The driver s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 32 If something is between an occupant and an air bag the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear Don t put anything be
353. wout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you d use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your hazard warning flashers i Changing a tire can cause an injury The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people You and they could be badly injured Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving Set the parking brake firmly The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and Put the shift lever in PARK P change a tire Be sure the all wheel drive transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL Turn off the e
354. y will show your selections The SEEK button is inactive if the front radio is in use While listening to a cassette tape press the SEEK button to hear the next selection on the tape Press and hold the SEEK button to go to the other side of the tape The SEEK button is inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is in use 3 32 While listening to a CD press the SEEK button to hear the next track on the CD The SEEK button is inactive if the CD mode on the front radio or the CD changer is in use PROG Program Press this button to switch between playing a cassette tape or a CD and listening to the radio The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening Theft Deterrent Feature RDS Radios THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your radio The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN If the radio is moved to a different vehicle it will not operate and LOCKED will be displayed When the radio and vehicle are turned off the blinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK is armed With THEFTLOCK activated your radio will not operate if stolen Audio Steering Wheel Controls You can control certain radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel Gra OnStar Voice Recognition You can press this button to interact with the OnStar system See the OnStar manual provided with your vehicle for more information PROG Pr
355. y and keep it at the proper level 6 15 If the system is ever reset accidentally you must change your oil at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Message The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Anytime your oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on reset the system The CHANGE ENGINE OIL message must be reset using the driver information center See Change Engine Oil Message in the Index for information on how to reset the system 6 16 What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Don t let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Inste
356. y operates in the following transfer case modes e 4HI Lock 4LO Lock 4LO Lock and Differential Lock It will not operate in 4HI If the TC2 button is pressed while in 4HI the light will flash for about 15 seconds and then go out The light should also come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN if it doesn t see your dealer for service If you restart your engine the system reverts to the TCS mode When the TRAC OFF light is on adjust your driving accordingly The TRAC OFF light will come on when a Traction Control System Anti Lock Brake System or engine related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service See TRAC OFF Light in the Index The Traction Control System as delivered from the factory will automatically come on whenever you start your vehicle 4 10 1 1 Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Steering Tips Driving on Curves It s important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here s why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there s no tra
357. y power outlets The two front outlets are located under the OnStar buttons on the instrument panel The two middle outlets are located on the back of the center console There is also one accessory power outlet located in the rear of the vehicle near the liftgate Flip the cover open to use the outlet Close the cover when the outlet is not in use Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlets and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on the accessory power plugs NOTICE Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle can damage it or keep other things from working as they should This wouldn t be covered by your warranty Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment and never use anything that exceeds the fuse rating When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment NOTICE Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty 2 65 OnStar System If Equipped OnStar is a vehicle communications system that offers a variety of services and provides a one touch hands free communication link between you and the OnStar Center To receive OnStar services a s
358. y to slow down before you hit them Wet brakes can cause accidents They won t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you re going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning doesn t happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just isn t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining 4 41 Driving Through Deep Standing Water NOTICE If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you can t avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very s
359. yed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices LOCK DOORS OUT OF PARK default The doors will lock when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK P LOCK DOORS MANUALLY The doors will not be locked automatically LOCK DOORS WITH SPEED The doors will lock when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph 13 km h for three seconds Choose one of the three options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on automatic door locks see Programmable Automatic Door Locks in the Index 2 100 Automatic Unlocking Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING appears in the display To select your personalization for automatic unlocking press the select button while AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices NLOCK ALL IN PARK default All of the doors ill unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK P NLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT All of the doors will nlock when the key is taken out of the ignition NLOCK DOORS MANUALLY The doors will not e unlocked automatically UNLOCK DRIVER IN PARK The driver s door will be unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK P Choose one of the four options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more in
360. you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are 4 45 Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you re ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you re not fresh such as after a day s work don t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it s ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course yov ll find experienced and able service experts in Hummer dealerships all across North America They ll be ready and willing to help if you need it 4 46 Here are some things you can check before a trip Windshield Washer Fluid Is the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades Are they in good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels
361. you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you don t you or others could be hurt You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Don t Don t do this or Don t let this happen iii Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this book you will find these notices NOTICE These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle A notice will tell you about something that can damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words You ll also see warning labels on your vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE iv Vehicle Symbols Your vehicle may be equipped with components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols used on your vehicle are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component gage or indicator reference the following topics in the Index Engine Compartment Overview Instrument Panel Comfort Controls Audio Systems Also see Warning Li
362. your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1804 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs HUMMER has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with HUMMER by dialing 1 866 HUMMER6 1 866 486 6376 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices HUMMER encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance If a U S customer wishes to write to HUMMER the letter should be addressed to HUMMER s Customer Assistance Center United States HUMMER Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33177 Detroit MI 48232 5177 1 866 HUMMER6 486 6376 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance
363. your own service work you ll need the proper service manual See Doing Your Own Service Work in the Index for additional information It is recommended that service work on your air conditioning system be performed by a qualified technician Air Conditioning Refrigerant R 134a 1 8 Ibs 0 8 kg Use Refrigerant Oil R 134a Systems Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Oil Filter eos acc ak as sis nies acs Wee PF44 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 88944151 PCV Valve 2 0 8 4 edie u eens CV948C Spark Plugs PTZ16R15 Denso PZTRSAIS NGK Fuel Filter meaane be Shes GF626 Wiper Blades Front 15706394 Wiper Blade Type Front ITTA Wiper Blade Length Front 22 0 inches 56 0 cm Wiper Blades Rear 15174476 Wiper Blade Type Rear 24 ITTA Wiper Blade Length Rear 11 inches 28 cm ACDelco Part No GM Part No Spark Plug Gap is 0 060 inches 6 69 Section 7 Maintenance Schedule This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety dependability and emission control performance 7 2 Introduction 7 20 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7 4 Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services 7 22 Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 5 Scheduled Maintenance 7 24 Part E Maintenance Record 7 16 Part B Owner Checks and Services IMPORTANT KEEP ENG
364. ys If the cassette tape or the compact disc player is being used play will stop during the announcement 3 16 Radio Messages CAL ERR Calibration Error This message is displayed when the radio has not been calibrated properly for the vehicle You must return to the dealership for service LOCKED This message is displayed when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up You must return to the dealership for service Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player The longer side with the tape visible should face to the right If the ignition is on but the radio is off the tape can be inserted and will begin playing A tape symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is inserted If you hear nothing but a garbled sound the tape may not be in squarely Press the eject symbol to remove the tape and start over While the tape is playing use the VOL AUDIO and SEEK controls just as you do for the radio The display will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of the tape is playing If you want to insert a tape while the ignition is off first press the eject symbol or DISP If an error appears on the display see Cassette Tape Messages later in this section 1 PREV Previous Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for previous

2003 HUMMER H2 Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents